Sharp MX-M6570 MX-M6570 MX-M7570 User Manual
Sharp MX-M6570 Manual
 |
View all Sharp MX-M6570 manuals
Add to My Manuals
Save this manual to your list of manuals |
Sharp MX-M6570 manual content summary:
- Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 1
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM User's Manual MODEL: MX-M6570 MX-M7570 Click to jump to the table of contents of function DOCUMENT FILING Storing jobs as files on the hard drive MANUAL FINISHING Using the manual finishing function SYSTEM SETTINGS Configuring settings to make the machine easier to - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 2
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Click a button below to move to the page that you wish to view. The following explanation assumes that Adobe Acrobat Reader is being used (Some buttons do not appear in the default state.). (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1) Return to top page button If an operation does not - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 3
ABOUT OPERATION MANUAL This manual explains how to use the MX-M6570/MX-M7570 digital multifunctional system. Please note • For information on installing the drivers and software cited in this manual, please refer to the Software Setup Guide. • For information on your operating system, please refer - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 4
1-40 1-41 • Toner Save Mode 1-41 • MOTION SENSOR 1-42 USER AUTHENTICATION 1-43 • AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER . . . . . 1-43 • AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORD 1-45 User Control 1-48 • User List 1-48 • Custom Index 1-51 • Organization /Group List 1-51 • Default Settings 1-51 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 5
PRINTING A MANUAL 121 HOW TO PLACE THE LONG PAPER GUIDE. . . . . 1-124 STAPLE MANUALLY 1-178 • SUPPLIES 1-185 • SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) MAINTENANCE 1-185 PUNCH MODULE (MX-PN16B 1-195 • DISCARDING PUNCH WASTE 1-195 PUNCH MODULE (MX-PN13B 1-197 • DISCARDING PUNCH WASTE 1-197 Sharp - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 6
206 • CLEANING THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER 1-206 • CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER. . . . 1-208 REPLACEMENT OF TONER CARTRIDGE 1-209 REPLACING THE WASTE TONER BOX 1-212 REPLACING THE STAMP CARTRIDGE 1-213 CHARACTER ENTRY NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFT KEYBOARD KEYS 1-215 • SET - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 7
Received faxes and printed papers are delivered USB memory device to the machine. Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). (5) needed. (8) Inner finisher* This staples paper. ► INNER FINISHER (page 1- to replace a toner cartridge. ► TURNING ON THE POWER (page 1-11) ► REPLACEMENT OF TONER CARTRIDGE (page - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 8
) (page 1-184) (15) Inserter* Covers and insertion sheets to be inserted into printed sheets can be loaded. Using the manual finishing function, you can directly feed paper into the finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) to staple, punch or fold the paper. (16) Curl - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 9
guide. ► LOADING PAPER INTO THE BYPASS TRAY (page 1-121) Cover for waste toner box Open this cover when you need to replace the waste toner box. Waste toner box This container collects excess toner that remains after printing. ► REPLACING THE WASTE TONER BOX (page 1-212) A service technician - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 10
cover to remove an original misfeed. (2) Original guides These guides help ensure that the original is scanned correctly. Adjust the guides to the width of the original. (3) Document feeder tray Place the original. Place the original with the print side facing up. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 11
used to connect a USB device such as a USB memory device to the machine. Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed). (2) USB connector (B type) This machine does not use cause the machine to malfunction. Important note for service technicians: The cable connected to the service connector must be less than 118" (3 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 12
. Blinks green during the time that the [Power] button does not operate immediately after the main power switch is switched on. Blinks green while print data is being received. ► TURNING ON THE POWER (page 1-11) (6) [Power] button Use this button to turn the machine's power on and off. ► TURNING - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 13
Pattern 3 Solidly Blinks On/Blinking Priority Errors that do not stop machine operation, such as almost out of toner. Errors that stop machine operation, such as misfeeds and out of toner. Blinking Priority Job in progress, such as paper feeding or output. Ready state or other state where jobs - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 14
a long time with the main power having been turned off prior to the [Power] button being turned off, abnormal noises, degraded image quality or other problems may result. • Turn off both the [Power] button and the main power switch and unplug the power cord if you suspect a machine failure, if there - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 15
finger and then lift it quickly. Use this method to select a key, tab or check box. Easy Scan HDD File retrieve No. of copies Sharp OSA 1 3 Text/Printed Photo Photo Text/Photo Sliding Slide the scroll bar (with your finger touching the panel) to scroll up and down a list with a large number - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 16
Number Call Search Number (B) Add New Send Same Image as Fax Address Print Individual List Preview CA ABC W Speaker Start Slider (sliding) A. Off On (A) Original Change Size/Direction. Erase Erase Shadow Around Sharpness Adjust Outline of Image Exposure Select Type/Exposure Back Touch [+] - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 17
a preview screen is "pinched", the screen image is reduced. When "spread", the image is enlarged. When "Double tapping", the image is also enlarged. (A) Send and Print Quick File Store Data Temporarily File Store Data in Folder Scan Original Again Without change Settings 1 / 7 CA Start 1-14 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 18
Operation Setting]. Key Operation Setting Keys Touch Sound Controls the key touch sound level, or turns the sound off. Make Key Touch Sound at Default Setting When you specify the exposure in the exposure adjustment screen of each mode, a bleep sounds three times when the reference value is reached - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 19
retrieve LINE Sharp OSA Easy Copy Easy Scan Print Release Sharp OSA Select functions that can be utilized in respective modes. Tap the tab, and the list of function keys is displayed. ► ACTION PANEL (page 1-28) Switch the pages for displaying shortcut keys. Toner Quantity Bk Operation Guide - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 20
. Icon Machine status A USB device is installed. Printer data is being printed. The field support system is enabled. Send data exists. Single-byte alphanumeric character entry Forward error . Remote operation is in progress. * Contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department. 1-17 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 21
, FTP/Desktop, Easy Fax, Internet Fax, Fax, Print Release, Data Entry, Address Book, Address Book (Easy Scan), Address Book (Easy Fax), Document Filing, Home Screen, Exchange (E-Mail), Gmail, or the Sharp OSA Screen. Display Favorite Menus as Default You can specify to display the "Favorite" first - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 22
Detail Copy Ratio Staple / Punch 100% Off CA Preview Copies Start Tap the mode icon. Easy Copy Easy Scan HDD File retrieve Sharp OSA LINE PRINTER Job Status 10:15 AM Easy Copy Easy Scan Print Release Sharp OSA Toner Quantity Bk Operation Guide Enlarge Display Mode Settings - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 23
screen, you can view output images or images stored in the machine using the touch panel. In Easy mode In Normal mode Preview Send and Print Quick File Store Data Temporarily File Store Data in Folder Scan Original Again Without change Settings CA Scan Start Again Keys used in the preview - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 24
/Quick File Folder: • File Retrieve of Custom Folder: • File Retrieve of Direct Print: Select whether the default display format of the received fax/I-Fax list screen is list or thumbnails. Select whether the default display format of the document filing main folder and temporary folder screens is - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 25
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Deleting a page 1 In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode. 2 Erase Specified Range Erase Specified Original Area Delete the Page Tap the page you want to delete, and tap . Move the Page Rotate 180 Degrees Specify Chapter Inserts - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 26
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Moving a page 1 In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode. 2 Tap the page you want to move, and drag to move the page. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Edit End You can also move the page by tapping [Move the Page] on the action panel and then tap of - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 27
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Setting chapter inserts When N-Up or 2-Sided is specified, you can move a page marked with to the first page. 1 In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode. 2 Tap the page you want to set chapter inserts. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Edit End 3 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 28
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Inserting a blank page 1 In the preview screen, tap to switch to edit mode. 2 Select the location to insert blank page. Cancel and Return Tap , and tap for the location into which you want to insert a blank page. 1 2 3 4 5 4 Edit End - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 29
31 31 97 OK Specify Range2 Specify Range3 Specify Range4 Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the erase range. Specify the erase range and then tap the [ 100% Exposure Auto Output N-Up Off Others Send and Print Program Registration Register Current Settings Quick File Store Data - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 30
the cursor by using the [←] and [→] keys. Tap the [C] key to delete one character to the left of the cursor. [Start] key Tap to perform a print or send job. CA Start [Cancel Copy] key, [Storing Canceled] key, [Cancel Scan] key, [Sending Canceled] key Tap to stop copying - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 31
action panel In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Display Action Panel as default.]. CONFIRMATION SCREEN FOR FAVORITE MENUS AND SETTINGS When you register frequently used functions you have configured for copying - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 32
Exposure 100% Auto Output N-Up Off Others No. of copies 78 45 12 0 1 9 6 3 C Plain 1 8½x11 1 2 8½x11 8½x11 5 3 8½x11 4 11x17 8½x11 Send and Print Quick File Store Data Temporarily File Store Data in Folder Call Eco Program Preview CA Proof Copy Start Tap . 2 Tap [Edit Favorite - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 33
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE • Favorites can be registered or edited only by authenticated users and administrators. • Unauthenticated users can call and use the favorites registered by administrators. Settings for calling Favorites and permitting/prohibiting editing can be - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 34
Date Operation Settings When you must have the machine perform exceptionally many print jobs or other special operation on a certain day, you can saving pattern only for that day. 1-40 Toner Save Mode This mode is used to reduce toner consumption. 1-41 MOTION SENSOR This sensor detects - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 35
Shut-Off Timer is also activated by pressing the [Power Save] button while the [Power Save] button is not lit. This mode is cleared when print data is being received, fax data is being output, or when the [Power Save] button is pressed while it is blinking. [Power Save] button/indicator - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 36
(normal mode), the settings recommended for copy mode appear. Recommended settings: 2-Sided Copy, N-Up, and Image Orientation Document filing print When you tap the [Choose Print Settings] in the action panel on the file list screen of document filing, the settings recommended for this mode appear - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 37
Power Shut-Off Timer turns on the power, and then the machine returns to Auto Power Shut-Off Mode immediately after completing the print job. Printed Sleep mode Print Sleep mode Fusing unit is turned Fusing unit is turned Fusing unit is turned off on off H L L L 1 To set "As soon as - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 38
value rises by a certain degree, but it results in faster - recovery. Motion Sensor: This enables switching of power saving modes by the motion sensor. * Factory default setting 1-35 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 39
, the machine enters the template2 (Mode3 (Energy Saving Priority1) between 8:00 and 18:00 hours). Then after that, it enters Mode4 (Energy Saving Priority2). Manual You can set a pattern for each time band. The machine already has the 3-pattern template. The Energy Save pattern can be added to the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 40
Eco Setting] → [Eco Scan Setting] . Eco Scan Setting Eco Scan Setting is used to execute a non-print operation such as image sending and scan to HDD while the fusing unit is turned Off. Set "Eco Scan Screen • Copy • Image Send • Document Filing • System Settings • Sharp OSA • Manual Finishing 1-37 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 41
into auto power shutoff mode based on frequency of use. If you want to manage machine power by using an energy saving pattern list, select [Manual] in [System Settings] - [Eco Setting] - [Change transition time by time of day.], and select an Automatic Update Pattern from the pull-down list or one - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 42
clock time. 9:00 12:00 13:00 18:00 OFF ON OFF ON OFF Start time Lunch break Finish time • The scheduling function does not support the power management settings in the Preheat Mode and Auto Power Shut-Off Mode. • The preset power-off time is subject to the following restrictions - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 43
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Specific Date Operation Settings You can configure a day on which you have high-output printing or want to perform a special operation as the "specific date" and set a specific energy saving pattern only for that specific date. The specific date - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 44
to reduce toner consumption. Toner consumption can be set for each print job of "Copy", "Printer", and "Prints (Document Filing)". Toner consumption can be selected from three levels. • Toner Save1 (Toner Consumption: Much) • Toner Save2 (Toner Consumption: Middle) • Toner Save3 (Toner Consumption - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 45
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE MOTION SENSOR This sensor detects the presence of a person that approaches the machine, and automatically wakes the machine from sleep mode (Motion Sensor Mode Only). Three settings are available for the detection range ( / / ). Motion sensor - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 46
method. For more information, see the explanations of the login methods. ► AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER (page 1-43) ► AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORD (page 1-45) For the settings that are required for user authentication, refer to User Control (page 1-48). AUTHENTICATION BY USER NUMBER The - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 47
Limit Group]. • To hide the number of pages that can be used after login: In "Settings (administrator)", disable [User Control] → [Default Settings] → [Display Usage Status after Login]. • To change the message display time: In "Settings" (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 48
is entered three times in a row. Contact the machine administrator to check the login name/password assigned to you. • To release the operation panel lock: In "Settings (Web version)", select [User Control] → [Default Settings] to release the lock. • To set [A Warning when Login Fails]: In "Settings - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 49
can be used when the administrator of the server provides LDAP service on the LAN (local area network). 2 User Authentication Enter login name and password. Login Name Password Auth to Touch to input Log-in Name Touch to Input Password Login Locally Select from List CA OK Enter the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 50
Tap the [OK] key. If the entered login name and password are authenticated, the number of remaining pages that the user can can be used after login: In "Settings (administrator)", disable [User Control] → [Default Settings] → [Display Usage Status after Login]. • To change the message display time - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 51
. [Store user authentication information for External Connect] must be enabled to use this function. • User List This shows the users stored as factory default and the currently stored users. An asterisk [*] appears in front of the user name of auto-registered users. When you select a user name - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 52
factory default. • System Administrator: The account for system maintenance, stored as factory default. This is granted. • Other User: This is used when a print job is executed using invalid user information. (This cannot be Other PIN Code/Password (See "Start Guide.")*1 sysadmin*1 users*1 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 53
-width/half-width characters for the user name for home directory path authentication. Password Authentication Settings*1 Authentication Server Organization/Group Pages Limit Group Authority Group Favorite Operation Group Default Billing Code My Folder Enter a maximum of 255 numeric digits for the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 54
by LDAP server. Active Directory: User authentication by Active Directory. Default Network Authentication Server Setting Use this to set the default network authentication server. When you log into Setting mode (Web version) or send a print job to the machine using user information that is not - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 55
an LDAP server or a directory service (Active Directory, etc.). Before using stored in the machine. Do not enter if the default folder is specified. Rename the properties that the machine network server. If 1000 users have already been manually registered, login will not be possible. Please delete old - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 56
control obtained from the server is not registered in the machine, the factory default user authority will be applied. • When this function is not enabled and Name and Password Standard authentication method using a login name and password. Authenticate a User by Login Name, Password and E-mail - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 57
modes or Setting mode. In that case, the administrator should tap the [Admin Password] key on the Setting mode screen and log in again. • To log in automatically registered users are created. Externally authenticated users in Sharp OSA can also be automatically registered. Cache Period Select - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 58
administrator can tap this key to carry out a manual clear. Disabling of Printing by Invalid User Printing by users whose information is not stored in the machine, such as printing without entering valid user information in the printer driver or printing of a file on an FTP server in Setting mode - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 59
of Login Screen Settings you have created here is displayed on the login screen. User Information Print Prints the following item lists. • User List • List of Number of Pages Used • Page enabled. Enable IPP Authentication Except for Printer Driver Enable IPP authentication for other than the printer - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 60
the list displays the edit screen for that group. For information on the settings, see "Settings (page 1-57)". To return a group to the factory default state, set "Select the Group Name to be the Registration Model" to "Unlimited" on the edit screen. Settings Item Group Name Select the Group Name - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 61
printing Creation of PDF for PC Browsing Approval Setting to Use Toner Save Mode Description Store a name of group (up to 32 characters). Select one of the previously stored groups for use as a template for the new group. When selected, the settings of this group are applied. The factory default - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 62
Filing Scan to HDD All allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed All allowed Color Scan Allowed Special Modes Usage Creating Downloadable File Prints (Document Filing) Approval Setting Special Modes Usage Document Filing Image Check Apprpval Setting Display only the Files of Logged-in - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 63
USING THE MACHINE Item Sharp OSA Approval Setting to Use a Sharp OSA Common Functions Approval Settings for 2-Sided Print Change Billing Code Output Scan Settings Fax Settings I-Fax Settings Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual) Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings (Admin) Inbound Routing ( - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 64
Security Settings Allowed Allowed Energy Save Allowed Allowed System Control Allowed Allowed Image Quality Adjustment Allowed Allowed Operation Manual Download Allowed Allowed Shortcut Page Setting Allowed Allowed * For information on each setting, see the setting mode list - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 65
Output Binding, Output, Offset, Output Tray, Separator Page, Staple Sort, Staple Position, Punch, and Fold. Select settings for Image Orientation Exposure, Original Image Type, and Resolution. Set the default output tray for document filing print. Turn this option ON to display large characters on - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 66
print stored jobs after login When retention is enabled in the printer driver and print data has been spooled to the machine, the spooled print data is automatically printed File Retrieve of Direct Print Select whether the default state of the file list screen for direct print shows the folders as - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 67
. Display Toner Quantity Select this to display the toner level in the fixed area. User Count This displays the total number of pages printed by each the selected user. • User List This shows the users stored as factory default and the currently stored users. When you select a user name, the user - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 68
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Resetting user counts Select a user in the setting screen and tap the [Clear Count] key. A count reset screen for that user will appear. The reset screen will vary depending on whether a single user or multiple users were selected. The items - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 69
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Card Setting Card Area Setting The data check during card reading can be set. Settings Item Check System Code only in FeliCa User Area mode Check Facility Code in HID mode Facility Code Importing from the setup file Description Check the System - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 70
must have multiple domain names and passwords. When you join an AD domain with a single domain name and password. Joining an AD domain To have )" - [User Control]→[Default Settings]→[Authentication Server Settings]. Name]. Machine user name and password In "Settings (administrator)", select - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 71
be used for user authentication in the AD domain. 1. Authentication by manual entry on the machine Perform authentication using the touch panel of the Control]→[Default Settings]→[Use IC Card for Authentication]. Enable "Settings (administrator)"→[User Control]→[Default Settings]→[Cache Password for - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 72
user taps [Select File from Network Folder to Print] on the action panel in document filing and Settings]→[Image Send Settings]→[Scan Settings]→[Default Address]→[Apply Home Directory of The . In this case, a user name and password cannot be entered manually. E-Mail Scan to E-Mail A logged in - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 73
. The default setting is authority. Favorite Operation Group Enter to set a favorite operation group. The default setting is favorite. My Folder Enter to set My Folder. The default setting is myfolder. Device Registration Account User Name Enter the user name to be used. Password Enter a password - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 74
billing codes Main Code Type Sub Code Default Code Description Used to categorize the results of the executed print and send jobs to enable efficient management ] → [Job Log Operation], and click [Save] button to download the job logs. Then sum up the data by classifying and arranging the stored job - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 75
billing code is enabled in "Settings (administrator)", the billing code entry window is displayed at the time of mode transition (at the time of printing/sending in document filing mode). Enter the main code or sub code as required. • To enable use of the billing code Select "Settings (administrator - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 76
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 2 Select Billing Code Main Code Execute Main Code Name Cancel and Return Add/Edit Billing Code Tap and select the main code from the list. MAIN001 MAIN002 Company 1 Company 2 MAIN003 Company 3 MAIN004 Company 4 MAIN005 Company 5 MAIN006 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 77
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Directly entering a billing code 1 Billing Code Please enter Billing Code. Main Code AAAA Sub Code AAAA Select from List Select from List When the billing code entry window is displayed, tap the box in [Main Code], then enter the main code. - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 78
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE REGISTERING A NEW BILLING CODE Register a new billing code. A billing code can be registered not only from the billing code entry window but also from "Settings". To register a billing code from Setting Mode Select "Settings" → [User Control] → [ - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 79
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 3 Main Code Registration Main Code Main Code Name Add New Tap [Add New] on the action panel. CA To return to the billing code selection window Tap . 4 (4) Main Code Registration Main Code Main Code Name (5) Cancel and Return End - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 80
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 7 Designate Public Address (Selected:1/32) Organization /Group List Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8 Clear Tap and select a group as a public destination Up to eight groups can be specified. After the settings are - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 81
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE EDITING OR DELETING THE REGISTERED BILLING CODE You can change or delete the registered billing code. The billing code can also be edited or deleted from "Settings". To edit or register a billing code from Setting mode Select "Settings" → [User - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 82
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE 4 Main Code Registration Main Code AAAA Main Code Name AAAA Available to Public to All Specify target public address Cancel and Return End Registration Register Next Billing Code. Edit the main code as required. For information on how to - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 83
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Deleting a billing code 1 Billing Code Please enter Billing Code. Main Code AAAA Sub Code AAAA Select from List Select from List CA Bypass Billing Code OK When the billing code entry window is displayed, tap the [Select from List] key of - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 84
you cannot register, edit, or delete a billing code. In addition, you cannot directly type in a billing code in the billing code entry window. Apply Default Code when Billing Code not entered If this function is enabled, a use code is always set while you are logging in with device account. Disable - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 85
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Correct a main code Selecting a main code from the list displays the window to correct the main code. For information on the settings, see "Settings (page 1-82)". After the setting has been completed, tap the [Submit] key; you can apply the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 86
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE Search for a sub code Enter the sub code and sub code name, then tap the [Search] key; the search result is displayed. Settings Sub Code Item Sub Code Name Available to Description Enter the sub code. Specify the code using up to 32 single-byte - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 87
USING THE MACHINE CLOUD LINK The Cloud Link function is used to connect the machine to a cloud service on the Internet, enabling you to upload scanned data and print data stored in the cloud. Uploading scanned data Printing data stored in the cloud The machine can connect to the following cloud - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 88
Edit Mode] on the action panel. Exit home edit mode and return to the home screen. To edit the home screen, refer to the "U/I Customize Guide". 1-85 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 89
Office 365 user account for ID/password authentication. 2 Enter your user account information for the cloud service. A screen for selecting tasks Execute Scan or Preview. PRINTING DATA IN A CLOUD SERVICE This section explains how to use the machine to print data in a cloud service. 1 Tap [Google - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 90
results using the Cloud Link function may not have the same quality as print results using other print methods (printer driver, etc.). The contents of some files may cause incorrect printing or prevent printing. • It may not be possible to use some or all Cloud Link functions in some countries or - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 91
printing with AirPrint vary depending on the OS and the application. • To print with AirPrint when the machine's user authentication function is used, enable [Enable IPP Authentication Except for Printer Driver] in "Settings (Administrator)" → [System Settings] → [User Control] → [Default Settings - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 92
Driver] in "Settings (Administrator)" → [System Settings] → [User Control] → [Default manual for the application to send a scanned document. The procedure for scanning in OS X is explained here as an example. (1) Place the original. (2) Click [Printers & Scanners] ([Print administrator password being - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 93
mDNS. When mDNS is disabled, the machine will not appear in the list of printers when AirPrint is used to print. This setting is linked to [Network Settings] → [Services Settings] → [mDNS Settings] → [mDNS] in "Settings (administrator)". IPP Specify whether or not the IPP port of the machine is - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 94
your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department. CONNECTING BY NFC This function may not support depending on the Android wake the machine manually. 2 Connecting to download the dedicated application. If the dedicated application is installed on your mobile device, it will start. You can print - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 95
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE CONNECTING BY QR CODE You can connect by displaying the QR code on the machine's touch panel and then having your mobile device (with the dedicated application already installed) read the QR code. The machine sends the information required for - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 96
is saved in the application. To connect to a destination other than the machine, select [Connect with the following access point]. To set manually, obtain the network information of the connection destination in advance. When [Connect with the following access point] is selected, configure the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 97
want to allow to be used to [Allow] in "Settings (administrator)" - [System Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Public Folder / NAS Setting]. (The factory default setting is "Allow".) • Set the NBT/WINS setting of the server port to [Valid] in "Settings (administrator)" - [System Settings] → [Security - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 98
after "\\" in the address bar (example: \\192.168.1.28). • Access restrictions are set for each folder, so you must enter the login name and password of the administrator account or of a user account that has been registered in the machine. • The maximum size per file is 2 GB. Public Folder - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 99
→1-Sided Copy Ratio Exposure 100% Auto Output N-Up Off Others HDD File retrieve No. of copies 78 45 12 0 Sharp OSA 1 9 6 3 C LINE PRINTER Job Status Send as well as print Quick File Store Data Temporarily File Store Data in Folder Call Eco Program Plain 1 A4 1 2 A4 A4 5 3 B4 4 A3 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 100
on only the computer. Operation by User who Has Password • Operational Authority: This is used to allow a user who has a password to operate the machine remotely. For information on the password, consult your service technician. • View Password Entry Screen: When operating the machine by remote - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 101
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE UNIVERSAL DESIGN IN THE MACHINE The structure of the machine and the software are designed to allow all people to use the machine with ease. UNIVERSAL DESIGN RELATED TO OPERATION Adjustment of operation panel angle The angle of the entire operation - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 102
of fax, Internet fax, and network scanner modes Exposure adjustment screen for Scan to HDD in document filing mode • Make Key Touch Sound at Default Setting When you specify the exposure in the exposure adjustment screen of each mode, a bleep sounds three times when the reference value is reached - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 103
is used to make the screen intuitive and easy to view. The toner level is always shown, eliminating the need to perform an action to check the toner level. For the procedures for editing the home screen, see "U/I Customize Guide". • High-contrast display (UD pattern) The touch panel image can be set - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 104
• Quick-view operation guide Touch the [Operation Guide] key in the home screen on the touch panel to display the operation guide. The operation guide provides simple explanations of with the output tray. Simple toner replacement • Toner box can be opened with one hand The box that contains - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 105
Total Count Full Color Total Count Count according to size Number of sheets according to size Invalid Paper Count Number of Reserved Sets Number of used in the Sharp OSA is recorded. The job mode type, such as copy or print is recorded. The name of the computer that sent a print job is recorded - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 106
a job is recorded. When an error occurs during a job, the cause of the error is recorded. The output mode of a printed job is recorded. The status of stapling is recorded. The staple count is recorded. The status of punching is recorded. The punch count is recorded. A job that uses the fold function - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 107
. Record the Machine ID entered by the service technician. PRINTING A MANUAL FROM THE OPERATION PANEL The manuals can be printed from the Operation Guide embedded in the machine. To print a manual, refer to the Quick Start Guide. Prohibiting printing of manuals from the operation panel In "Settings - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 108
THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER LOADING PAPER IMPORTANT POINTS ABOUT PAPER NAMES AND LOCATIONS OF TRAYS Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Bypass tray Tray 5 (MX-LC18) Tray 5 (MX-LC19) THE DEFINITION OF "R" IN PAPER SIZE To indicate the landscape setting, "R" is added to the end of the name of a paper size - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 109
SHARP Service Department. • The image quality and toner paper specifications, see the specifications in the "Start Guide". • Recycled paper, colored paper and pre-punched paper used for two-sided printing Paper Type Paper Size Plain, Recycled, Color, Letter Head, Pre-Printed, Punched, Heavy Paper - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 110
the machine, see "SPECIFICATIONS" in the "Start Guide" and "Tray Settings (page 1-126)". • dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department. Tray 1/2 Permitted Pre-Printed Permitted Permitted Permitted - Permitted *1 when a large capacity tray (MX-LC18/MX-LC19) is installed *2 "Plain Paper 1" is - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 111
(55 g/m2) • Heavy paper as thick as 110 lbs. cover (300 g/m2) over • Irregularly shaped paper • Stapled paper • Damp paper • Curled paper • Paper whose print side or reverse side has been already printed on by another printer or multifunction device. • Paper with a wave-like pattern due to moisture - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 112
tray 1. A maximum of 850 sheets of 8-1/2" × 11" (A4) paper can be loaded into tray 2. If you loaded paper of a different type or size from the paper previously loaded, be sure to check the settings in "Settings (administrator)". An incorrect setting may cause print failure, printing on paper of an - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 113
with the print side facing up. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 1250 sheets for tray 1, or maximum of 850 sheets for tray misfeeds. Changing the paper size 1 Tray 1 Tray 2 Paper guide Remove the paper size guide. With the base of the tray pressed all the way down - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 114
Move the paper size guide slightly to verify that it has locked into place. • When attaching the paper size guide, place the transparent sheet in direct contact with correctly, automatic paper selection will not operate correctly and printing may take place on the wrong size or type of paper or - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 115
) can be loaded into tray 3. A maximum of 500 sheets of paper from 11" x 17" to 5-1/2" × 8-1/2"R into tray 4. To load tab paper, the dedicated guide must be installed. • If you loaded paper of (administrator)". An incorrect setting may cause print failure, printing on paper of an incorrect size, or - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 116
once and cause a misfeed. 4 Indicator line Insert the paper into the tray. Load the paper with the print side facing up. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 500 sheets). 5 Gently push the paper tray into the machine. Push the tray firmly all the way into the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 117
triangle mark position. Install the guide so that it may cover the guide plates. Adjust the guide plates in the tray to match the longitudinal and transversal dimensions of the paper to be loaded. 3 Insert the tab paper into the tray. Place the tab paper with the print side facing up so that - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 118
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER See the following figure and adjust the tab position of the tab paper. Originals Tab paper Side 1 Top edge 1st page JKL GHI DEF ABC 1st page 2nd page 3rd page 4th page Tail edge 4th page 3rd page 2nd page 4 Gently push the tray into the machine, and - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 119
of 8-1/2" × 11" and A4 paper. • Large capacity tray (MX-LC19) stores a maximum of 3000 sheets of paper from 12" × 18" (A3W) to 8-1/2" × 11"R (B5). When changing the paper size, consult the dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department. Do not place heavy objects on the tray or press down on the tray - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 120
the paper may cause skewed feeding and paper misfeeds. Large capacity tray (MX-LC19) 1 Press the operation button. The operation button blinks, and Load the paper with the print side facing up. The stack must not be higher than the indicator line (maximum of 3000 sheets). When a certain volume of - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 121
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER • Do not insert your hand into the space inside the paper table when you load paper. • Do not insert spare paper or objects into the space inside the tray. 5 Gently push the paper tray into the machine. Push the tray firmly all the way into the machine - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 122
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►LOADING PAPER Changing the paper size for the large capacity tray (MX-LC19) 1 Loosen the paper guide screw. 2 Plate Slide the plate of the paper guide. Slide the plate until the red line appears at the center of the size window of the plate. 3 Adjust the paper - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 123
that it locks into place. You will hear a "click" when the paper guide locks. 7 Set the paper size and paper type. Be sure to set is not configured correctly, automatic paper selection will not operate correctly and printing may take place on the wrong size or type of paper or a misfeed may occur - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 124
140 lbs. index and 110 lbs. cover: 20 sheets) for continuous printing, just like operation using other trays. • When using plain paper other than Sharp standard paper or special media other than SHARP-recommended transparency film, glossy paper, or when printing on the reverse side of paper that has - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 125
vertically Important points when using label sheets • For more information, consult the dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department. • Some labels may have to be loaded into the bypass tray in the specified orientation. Follow such instructions. If a form is already printed on the labels, and the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 126
the tray. 2 Load the paper with the print side facing down. Insert the paper along the bypass tray guides all the way into the bypass tray until sheets and must not be higher than the indicator line. 3 Set the bypass tray guides correctly to the width of the paper. Adjust the bypass tray guides - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 127
MACHINE►LOADING PAPER HOW TO PLACE THE LONG PAPER GUIDE The steps for attaching the optional long paper feeding tray to the bypass tray are explained below. 1 Extend the auxiliary guide of the long paper feeding tray. 2 Pull out the extension guide of the bypass tray. 3 Attach the long paper - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 128
Fax] cannot be selected. • If the paper size specified here is different from the size of paper that is loaded into a tray, a problem or misfeed may occur when printing. • To change the paper size in a tray, see "LOADING PAPER (page 1-105)". • Paper properties such as "Fixed Paper Side" are - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 129
PAPER Tray Settings Paper Tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Tray 5 (MX-LC18) Tray 5 (MX-LC19) Bypass Tray Paper Type Plain 1/2, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Letter Head, Pre-Punched, Color, User Type 1 to 8 Plain 1/2, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Letter Head, Pre-Punched, Color, Heavy Paper 1 to 2*1, User Type - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 130
Type Size Inserter (Upper) Inserter (Lower) Plain, Pre-Printed, Recycled, Letter Head, Pre-Punched, Color, Heavy Paper Registering the paper size saves you the trouble of setting the size each time you default setting is 420mm. The Y direction can be set between 90mm and 305mm. The factory default - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 131
be registered. List name Description Type Name Register any name. The factory default names are "User Type 1" to "User Type 8". Fixed Paper printing. Disable Reverse Use this setting when using paper that cannot be reversed. Disable Staple Use this setting when paper used cannot be stapled - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 132
original in the automatic document feeder. Depending the type and status of the original, use the document glass. Follow the instructions to select the method for placing the original. Detectable original sizes In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Device - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 133
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►HOW TO PLACE THE ORIGINAL Original Feeding Mode The following original feeding modes can be set to operate by default in copy, image send, and scan to HDD. When a mode is frequently used, this saves you from having to select the mode in another mode - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 134
A4) • Before inserting originals into the document feeder tray, be sure to remove any staples or paper clips. • If originals have damp spots due to correction fluid, ink or copy, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper or originals printed with thermal transfer ink ribbon should not be fed through - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 135
(A3W) cannot be used. Non-standard size (Maximum size that can be specified manually) Copy mode: 11-5/8" (longitudinal) × 17" (transversal) 297 mm (longitudinal) . Align the edges evenly and face them up Up to 150 sheets can be inserted. After scanning is finished on the automatic document feeder - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 136
5-51)" 1 Open the automatic document feeder. 2 Load the paper with the print side facing down. Original size detector Place the original face down and align the the document glass, the size can be detected easily if a blank sheet of 8-1/2" x 11" (A4), 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" (B5), or other standard size - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 137
, close the automatic document feeder. If the unit is left open, parts outside of the original will be copied in black, causing excessive use of toner. • When closing, open the automatic document feeder all the way and then close it. • If originals have damp spots due to correction fluid, ink or - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 138
Print Release Sharp OSA Job Status Print Scan Job Job Queue User_1_User_1_User User_2_User_2_User LINE PRINTER Fax Internet Fax Back Progress / Sets ---/0004 ---/0004 Status Encrypt PDF Spooling Back Toner Quantity Bk Operation Enlarge Guide User Control] → [Default Settings] → [ - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 139
machine from a computer. The jobs move to the Job Queue list after the transfer is completed. If you printed an encrypted PDF file by direct print, enter the password from here to print the file. ► PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE (page 3-89) • Job Queue list Lists jobs in progress and in the queue - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 140
the job that you wish to stop or delete. 2 Print Scan Job Address Broadcast004 Print Image Sending Fax Internet Fax Activity Report Set Time Pages Status the [Job Queue] key. Job Queue Complete When you wish to stop a print job being sent from the computer, tap the [Spool] key. 3 Tap - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 141
tab The priority job is moved directly under the job currently in progress. 1 Tap the job status display and tap the job for priority processing. 2 Print Job Job Queue Copy Copy Copy Copy Copy Copy Copy Copy Copy Scan Fax Internet Fax Progress / Sets Status Start Time 0100/0100 Paper Empty - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 142
the job you want to move, and tap the "Priority Change" key. Print Job Job Queue Copy Copy Scan Fax Internet Fax Progress / Sets Status Start below cannot be moved. Job currently in progress, interrupt copy jobs, list print jobs, and jobs when Passing Prohibited is set in the system settings. - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 143
A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS 1 Tap the job status display and tap the tab for the job whose contents you wish to check. 2 Print Job Job Queue Copy Copy Copy Copy Copy Copy Copy Copy Copy Scan Fax Internet Fax (1) Progress / Sets Status Start Time 0100/0100 Paper Empty - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 144
and tap the tab for the job whose contents you wish to check. 2 Print Scan Fax (1) Job Job Queue Progress / Sets Status Internet Fax Start Time Tap and then tap [Check Details Copy 13:43 06/22 0001/0001 OK Choose Print Settings of Selected Job] on the action panel. Copy 13:33 06/22 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 145
THE STATUS READING THE JOB LIST The meaning of each job icon and message displayed in "Status" is as follows: Icons indicating the job type Print job (RGB/CMYK) Copy job Scan to E-mail job Scan to FTP job Scan to Network Folder job Scan to Desktop job Fax transmission job - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 146
" Print job in progress "Copying" Copy job in progress "Connecting" Connecting "Sending" Sending "Receiving" Receiving "Processing" Processing "Tel" Speaking with the other party using an extension telephone "Stopped" The job has been stopped "Toner Empty" Toner Empty "Paper - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 147
not been printed. The received data (each page) has not been printed or forwarded. (The received data has not been deleted.) "Received" Printed received fax when delivery confirmation is set * If the receiving machine is a SHARP machine, the receiving machine will return "dispatched" if the fax - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 148
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK ADDRESS BOOK ADDRESS BOOK "Contacts" and "Group" can be stored in the address book. For a contact, more than one address can be stored, including fax, e-mail, Internet fax and direct SMTP addresses. Registering addresses stored as "Contacts" as well as - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 149
[Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Category Displayed as Default]. Select a category to be displayed with the default. • None • Frequent Use • Categories 1 to 32 • Show Search Number Direct TX Add New Send Same Image as Fax Address Print Individual List Preview CA Speaker Start 1-146 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 150
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK Selecting "Contacts" or "Group" Tap a "Contacts" or "Group", and the tapped "Contacts" or "Group" is selected. After selection, tap . To add "Contacts" and "Group", refer to the following. ► STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH DIRECT ENTRY (page 1-150) ► STORING - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 151
5 Frequent Use Category 6 Category All Sort Narrow Down Fax Sending History Call by Search Number Direct TX Add New Send Same Image as Fax Address Print Individual List Preview CA ABC W Speaker Start Narrowing by job type Tap the [Narrow Down] key to select a job on the screen that appears - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 152
Sort Narrow Down Fax ALL A D A G B J C M P T ABC W Sending History Call by Search Number Direct TX Add New Send Same Image as Fax Address Print Individual List Preview CA Speaker Start Narrowing by keyword Tap to display a search screen. Select a target for search, enter a keyword and then - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 153
can be registered from [Address Book] in "Settings (Web version)". 4 Tap the [Register] key. The first address of each address type is set as the default address. If no address has the checkbox next to it selected, a confirmation screen will appear asking you if you want to select - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 154
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK STORING ADDRESSES THROUGH GLOBAL ADDRESS SEARCH Store the results of searching the global address book as new addresses in the address book. Global address search requires an LDAP server. Disable Destination Registration Using Global Address Search In "Settings - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 155
screen appears, enter your user name and password, and tap the [OK] key. ► AUTHENTICATION BY LOGIN NAME/PASSWORD (page 1-45) After selecting a server ] key. The first address of each address type is set as the default address. If no address has the checkbox next to it selected, a confirmation - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 156
address is registered in the address book and the transmission log screen is restored. The first address of each address type is set as the default address. If no address has the checkbox next to it selected, a confirmation screen will appear asking you if you want to select - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 157
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK 5 Tap the [OK] key. STORING GROUPS Register "Group" by selecting addresses from those already stored as "Contacts". In this case of registration, only reference to addresses already stored takes place, and so, the total number of registered addresses (maximum - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 158
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK 5 CCC Registered Address 2 123 [email protected] Tap the address to be registered in the "Group", and then tap the key. You can select more than one address. Preview CA Start Info. 6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 to register addresses. After address - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 159
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK EDITING/DELETING ADDRESSES IN ADDRESS BOOK You can edit or delete "Contacts" or "Group" information stored in the address book as well as addresses listed under "Contacts" and "Group". Editing/deleting contacts and groups 1 In the address book screen, select - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 160
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK Editing/deleting addresses 1 Select a contact or group you wish to edit, and tap [Edit] on the action panel. In the address book screen, select the contact or group that has the address you want to edit, and tap [Edit] on the action panel. Only one contact - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 161
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK SETTING THE SCOPE FOR PUBLICIZING CONTACTS AND GROUPS "Contacts" and "Group" stored in the address book can be shared within a specified group or stored as personal contacts that only you are allowed to access. If no publicity scope is specified, stored " - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 162
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►ADDRESS BOOK If you have logged in as the administrator, select any user name desired from the user list. To register a user: In "Settings (administrator)", select [User Control] → [User Control] → [User List] → [User Registration]. DELETING THE TRANSMISSION HISTORY You - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 163
images. Color/Grayscale: Select the compression format used for saving color/grayscale images. To enhance black text when scanning, select "Bk Letter Emphasis". Set as Default used Set an address as - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 164
used Direct SMTP Direct SMTP Address Add Hostname or IP Address. Compression Mode Set as Default used FTP FTP Address File Type Directory User Name Password Enable SSL Description To store a new fax number, select [New Address] and enter the fax number in the fax number entry field. To search - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 165
"Bk Letter Emphasis". Enter a user name in the computer to be used for transmission. Enter the password associated with the entered user name. Use SSL to encrypt data before transmission. Set an address as a default address. To store a new path, select [New Address] and enter the path in the path - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 166
MX-FN34 MX-FN21 MX-FN35 MX-FN22 MX-TM10 Folding unit MX-FD10 Inserter MX-CF11 Curl correction unit MX-RB18 Paper pass unit Relay unit Punch module MX-RB26 MX-RB24 MX-RB13 MX-PN16B MX-PN13B Description LOADING PAPER IN THE LARGE CAPACITY TRAY (page 1-116) HOW TO PLACE THE LONG PAPER GUIDE - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 167
-PF10 MX-FX15 MX-FWX1 MX-AMX1 MX-USX1 MX-USX5 MX-USX10 MX-USX50 MX-USXA0 AR-SU1 AR-SV1 Description Adds barcode fonts to the machine. Enables Fax. Enables Internet Fax. Sharp OSA (page 1-199) This software enables integrated management of documents and computer files. This stamps each original page - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 168
tray is slidable. To print on large paper such as A3 size, extend the tray. (2) Staple case release lever Use this lever to remove the staple case. (3) Staple case This holds the staple cartridge. Pull the case out to replace the staple cartridge or remove a staple jam. (4) (5) (4) Lever Use this - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 169
MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SUPPLIES The finisher requires the following staple cartridge: Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SCX1 INNER FINISHER MAINTENANCE When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 170
USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 4 Remove the empty staple cartridge from the staple case. 5 Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case as shown. Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place. 6 Replace the staple case. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 171
FINISHER This device outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper. As needed, it staples each set. You can also perform stapling manually. To punch holes in printed paper, install an optional hole punch module. PART NAMES (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (1) Output tray (upper tray) The tray - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 172
USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES HOW TO STAPLE MANUALLY You can perform stapling manually. Make sure the manual staple key is lit green. 1 Place the paper that you want to staple in the insertion slot. When you place the paper, the manual staple key blinks green. After two seconds elapse - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 173
THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SUPPLIES The finisher requires the following staple cartridge: Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SC11 FINISHER MAINTENANCE When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 174
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 4 Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place. 5 Push the staple case firmly back in. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. 6 Close the front cover. Make a proof copy in - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 175
staggering each set of paper. As needed, it staples each set. To punch holes in printed paper, install an optional hole punch module. PART NAMES (1) (4) (2) (3) (1) Staple compiler This temporarily stacks paper to be stapled. (2) Output tray Stapled and offset output is delivered to this tray. The - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 176
SUPPLIES The finisher (large stacker) requires the following staple cartridge: Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SCX2 FINISHER (LARGE STACKER) MAINTENANCE When the staple cartridge runs out of staples, a message will appear in the operation panel. Follow - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 177
PERIPHERAL DEVICES 3 Remove the empty staple cartridge. When staples remain, the staple cartridge cannot be removed. 4 Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. 5 Install a staple case. Push the staple case in until it clicks into - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 178
MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES DISCARDING STAPLE WASTE When a finisher is used for stapling, staple waste is produced. The staple waste is collected in the staple waste box. Follow the steps below to discard staple waste. 1 Open the front cover. 2 Grasp the tab of the staple waste box, gently pull - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 179
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 4 Close the front cover. 1-176 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 180
each set of paper, the staple sort function that staples each set of prints, the saddle stitch function that automatically staples the center of the sheets and folds the sheets in half, and the paper folding function that folds paper in half. You can also perform stapling manually. To punch holes in - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 181
USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES HOW TO STAPLE MANUALLY You can perform stapling manually. Make sure the manual staple key is lit green. 1 Place the paper that you want to staple in the insertion slot. When you place the paper, the manual staple key blinks green. After two seconds elapse - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 182
USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES SUPPLIES The saddle stitch finisher requires the following staple cartridge: Finisher unit Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SC11 Saddle stitch unit Staple cartridge (approx. 2000 staples per cartridge x four cartridges - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 183
Open the front upper cover. 2 Remove the staple case. 3 Remove the empty staple cartridge. 4 Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. Push the staple cartridge in until it clicks into place. 5 Push the staple case firmly back in. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 184
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 6 Close the front upper cover. Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly. Replacement the staple cartridge (saddle stitch unit) Before starting this procedure, remove all output from the output tray of the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 185
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 3 Remove the staple case. 4 Remove the empty staple cartridge. 5 Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. Replace both staple cartridges. 6 Push the staple case firmly back in. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. 1-182 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 186
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 7 Push the front lower cover back in. 8 Close the front upper cover. Make a test print or copy using the saddle stitch function to verify that stapling takes place correctly. 1-183 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 187
offset function that outputs sorted paper while staggering each set of paper, the staple sort function that staples each set of prints, the saddle stitch function that automatically staples the center of the sheets and folds the sheets in half, and the paper folding function that folds paper in half - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 188
finisher (large stacker) requires the following staple cartridge: Finisher unit Staple cartridge (approx. 5000 staples per cartridge x three cartridges) MX-SCX2 Saddle stitch unit Staple cartridge (approx. 2000 staples per cartridge x four cartridges) MX-SCX1 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER (LARGE STACKER - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 189
up and then out. 3 Remove the empty staple cartridge. When staples remain, the staple cartridge cannot be removed. 4 Insert a new staple cartridge into the staple case. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. 5 Install a staple case. Push the staple case in until it clicks into - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 190
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 6 Close the front cover. Make a proof copy in staple sort function to verify that stapling takes place correctly. Replacement the staple cartridge (saddle stitch unit) Before starting this procedure, remove all output from the output tray of the saddle - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 191
USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 3 Lower the staple case release lever and remove the staple case. Pull the staple case out to the left. Replace both staple cartridges. 4 Press the lock button to open the release lever. 5 Remove the empty staple cartridge. Press the lock button to open - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 192
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 7 Press the lock button to open the release lever. 8 Push the staple case firmly back in. Align of the staple case with of the unit. Push the staple case in until it clicks into place. 9 Push the saddle stitch unit in. 10 Close the front cover. - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 193
• Do not put your fingers into the staple waste box. The staples may prick and injure your fingers. • Do not discard the staple waste in a plastic bag. The staples may create holes in the bag. 3 Replace the staple waste box. Make sure that the staple waste box is replaced correctly. 4 Close the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 194
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES DISCARDING PAPER WASTE When folded paper is trimmed in trimmer settings, paper waste is generated. Paper waste is collected in the paper waste box. Follow the operation procedure to remove paper waste. Using the trimmer function trims a side drop at the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 195
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 4 Close the front cover. 1-192 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 196
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES FOLDING UNIT A folding unit can be used for Z-Fold, C-Fold, Accordion Fold, Double Fold, and Half Fold. A finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is required to install the folding unit. PART NAMES (1) (2) (3) (1) Top cover - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 197
THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES INSERTER Covers and insertion sheets to be inserted into printed sheets can be loaded. Using the manual finishing function, you can directly feed paper into the finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) to staple, punch or fold the paper. For - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 198
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES PUNCH MODULE (MX-PN16B) The punch module can be installed on a finisher or saddle stitch finisher to waste. 3 Replace the punch waste box. If the punch waste box is not replaced properly, printing will not be possible to use the punch function. 1-195 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 199
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 4 Close the front cover. 1-196 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 200
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES PUNCH MODULE (MX-PN13B) The punch module can be installed on a finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) to punch holes in paper to be output. A - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 201
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►PERIPHERAL DEVICES 3 Gently push the box back in. 4 Close the front cover. 1-198 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 202
(external applications) over a network. When you use a machine that supports Sharp OSA, you can link controls on the operation panel and device functions be tapped. Easy Copy Easy Scan Print Release Sharp OSA Toner Quantity Bk Operation Guide Enlarge Display Mode Settings Total Count LCD - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 203
User Registration", "User Count Display", "User Count Reset", "User Information Print", and "The Number of User Name Displayed Setting" can be used. of the machine. In "Settings", select [System Settings] → [Sharp OSA Settings] and change the setting for [External Accounting Application Settings] - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 204
count mode can also be used when the user control function is disabled.) To enable the external count mode: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Sharp OSA Settings] → [External Accounting Application Settings] and enable the [External Account Control] setting alone. 1-201 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 205
Setting Specify how application cookies are handled when using an application in Sharp OSA. When "Hold Cookie" is selected, the machine holds cookies control the UI of the machine. Timeout Enter a timeout. The default setting is 20 seconds. Browser Select the Web browser type. Extended Platform - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 206
Body Text Connection Test Settings The Fax or I-Fax message reception can be controlled by Sharp OSA applications. Enter the application name to receive. Enter the Web service address. Enter a timeout. The default setting is 20 seconds. Enter the address to which a notification e-mail is sent when - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 207
When linked to an external application, you can store and manage addresses in order to use a service that uses a polling function. Item Settings Server 1 - Server 2 Polling Address Set to enable Enter the check interval for the server. The default is 1 minute. Timeout Set the timeout time. The - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 208
occurs, the "Paper Jam" message will appear in the touch panel and printing and scanning will stop. In this event, tap the [Check how to remove touch panel. When the key is tapped, instructions for removing the misfeed will appear. Follow the instructions. When the misfeed is cleared, the message - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 209
how to clean the machine, replace the toner cartridge, the waste toner box, and the stamp cartridge. REGULAR MAINTENANCE THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER If the document glass or document backplate sheet becomes dirty, the dirt will appear as dirty spots, colored lines, or white - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 210
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE SCANNING AREA If black lines or white lines appear in images scanned using the automatic document feeder, clean the scanning area (the thin long glass next to the document glass). To clean this part, use the glass cleaner that is stored in the automatic document - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 211
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE 6 Replace the glass cleaner. CLEANING THE BYPASS FEED ROLLER If paper misfeeds frequently occur when feeding heavy paper through the bypass tray, wipe the surface of the feed roller with a clean soft cloth moistened with water or a neutral detergent. 1-208 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 212
should keep one set of replacement toner cartridges on hand so that you can replace a toner cartridge immediately when toner runs out. Empty toner cartridge can be replaced without interrupting a copy/print job. Replacement message If you continue printing, the following message appears. When this - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 213
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE►MAINTENANCE 1 Open the front cover. 2 Pull the toner cartridge toward you. Gently pull out the toner cartridge horizontally. If the cartridge is pulled out abruptly, toner may spill out. 3 Take out a new toner cartridge from its package and shake it five or six times. - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 214
of use, the color may become light or the image blurred. • Your service technician will collect used toner cartridges. • To view the approximate amount of toner remaining (indicated in %), hold down the [Home Screen] key during printing or in standby mode. When the percentage falls to "25-0%", keep - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 215
during printing. When the waste toner box becomes full, the message "Replace waste toner box." will appear. When this message appears, tap the guidance key that appears on the touch panel to view the procedure for replacing the waste toner box. When the key is tapped, instructions for replacing - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 216
Supplies Stamp cartridge (2 in package) AR-SV1 1 Open the automatic document feeder. 2 Remove the document backplate sheet from the automatic document feeder. Remove the sheet slowly. Place the removed sheet with the side that was attached face up on the document glass. 3 Grasp the tab on the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 217
unit in until it clicks into place. 7 Close the automatic document feeder to attach the document backplate sheet. When the automatic document feeder is closed, the document backplate sheet on the document glass attaches to the automatic document feeder. 8 Make sure that the document backplate - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 218
under which you enter characters. If "External Keyboard" is selected in "Settings" → [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Keyboard Settings] → [Default Keyboard Setting] → [Set Keyboard Priority], the soft keyboard will not appear. To register words: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 219
THE MACHINE►CHARACTER ENTRY SET THE KEYBOARD SETTING In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Keyboard Settings]. Keyboard Settings Default Keyboard Setting Configure settings for the keyboard used for entry on the text. Keyboard Select Change the key layout and - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 220
SEQUENCE 2-5 • Default settings for copying MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE 2-18 2-18 2-18 ENLARGE/REDUCE AUTO RATIO SELECT MANUAL DESTINATION SORT/GROUP SETTING STAPLE SETTINGS PUNCH SETTINGS FOLD • REPEATING THE SAME IMAGE ON ONE SHEET (REPEAT LAYOUT 2-55 2-55 2-57 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 221
PATTERN PRINT 2-83 • FORCIBLY PRINTING TRACEABLE INFORMATION (TRACKING INFORMATION PRINT COVERS AND INSERTION SHEETS (PAGE LAYOUT 2-119 • INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN BETWEEN TRANSPARENCY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT 2-129 • ADJUSTING THE SHARPNESS OF AN IMAGE (SHARPNESS 2-130 • THE ADJUST DENSITY AREA - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 222
CA Preview Copies You can select these functions in easy mode. • Paper Select ►page 2-11 • 2-Sided Copy ►page 2-15 • Copy Ratio ►page 2-21 • Staple / Punch ►page 2-39, ►page 2-45 1 Start • Original ►page 2-28 • Exposure ►page 2-18 • N-Up ►page 2-55 • Card Shot ►page 2-59 To select a function - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 223
Off Plain 1 8½x14 Plain 1 8½x14 Check the current settings. Others Display keys other than the function keys indicated above. 1 Plain 1 8½x11 Send and Print Quick File Store Data Temporarily File Store Data in Folder Call Eco Program Preview CA Displays the functions that can be utilized in - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 224
chapter. You can also restore the default copy settings before executing copying In 8½x11 Tray 1 Detail 2-Sided Copy Copy Ratio Staple / Punch 100% Off 1 → 1 CA Preview Output N-Up Off Others NNoo..ooffccooppieiess 1 Send and Print Quick File Store Data Temporarily File Store Data in - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 225
mode Original 8½x11 Paper Select 8½x11 Tray 1 Detail 2-Sided Copy Copy Ratio Staple / Punch 100% Off 1 → 1 CA Preview Copies 1 Start In 1 2 8½x11 8½x11 5 3 8½x14 4 11x17 8½x11 Send and Print Quick File Store Data Temporarily File Store Data in Folder Call Eco Program Preview - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 226
Select 8½x11 Tray 1 2-Sided Copy Detail Copy Ratio Staple / Punch 100% Off 1 → 1 CA Preview Auto Output N-Up Off Others Send and Print Quick File Store Data Temporarily File Store Data elapsed. These settings are used to change the default settings for copy mode. The following settings can - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 227
print output method and output tray that are selected by default. Specify the output tray. Configure staple settings Set whether or not offset is performed in the default image to change pages, and rotate or delete the image. ► MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF EXPOSURE AND ORIGINAL TYPE (page 2-18) In Easy mode - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 228
1 Detail 2-Sided Copy Copy Ratio Staple / Punch 100% Off 1 NNoo..ooffccooppieiess 1 Send and Print Quick File Store Data Temporarily near the standard size. In this case, manually set the original size. ► SELECTING THE ORIENTATION blank sheet of 8-1/2" x 11" (A4), 5-1/2" x 8-1/2" - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 229
original as shown below. If you place the original in an incorrect orientation, it may result in punching at an unexpected position or stapling. On "Preview Screen", view the image orientation or preview image. ► COPY PREVIEW (page 2-8) Document glass Document feeder tray abc abc abc abc Set - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 230
detected correctly because it is a non-standard size or when you want to change the paper size for copying, you can select the paper tray manually. • If the selected tray runs out of paper during a copy job and there is another tray that has the same size and type of paper - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 231
you want to use Detail for copying, and tap the keys for any Paper Select 8½x11 2-Sided Copy Copy Ratio Staple / Punch other settings you want to select. 100% Off Tray 1 1 → 1 • Paper Select ►page , change the paper tray manually. 3 Tap the [Preview] key. ► PREVIEW SCREEN (page 1-20) 2-12 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 232
x11 Check the paper (tray) you want to use Detail for copying, and tap the keys for any Paper Select 8½x11 2-Sided Copy Copy Ratio Staple / Punch other settings you want to select. 100% Off Tray 1 1 → 1 • Paper Select ►page 2-11 • 2-Sided Copy ►page 2-15 • Copy Ratio ►page 2-21 CA Preview - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 233
of copies: Tap the number of copies key to specify the number of copies. Original 8½x11 Paper Select 8½x11 Tray 1 2-Sided Copy Detail Copy Ratio Staple / Punch 100% Off 1 → 1 CA Preview Copies 1 Start 2-14 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 234
the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. ► Specifying the orientation of the original (page 2-28) • Paper Select ►page 2-11 • Copy Ratio ►page 2-21 • Staple / Punch ►page 2-39, ►page 2-45 • Original ►page 2-28 • Exposure ►page 2-18 • N-Up ►page 2-55 • Card Shot ►page 2-59 2-15 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 235
SIDED COPYING Originals copy Automatic 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals Dual-side copy helps to save paper. To change the default 2-sided copy mode: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [2-Sided Copy]. 1 Place the original - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 236
the original is not selected automatically. In this event, change the paper tray manually. 5 Tap the [Start] key. 6 Original 8½x11 Place next original. tap the Detail [Start] key to scan the original. Paper Select 8½x11 Staple / Punch Tap the same key you tapped in step 5. Off Repeat this - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 237
This section explains how to select the original type depending on the original to be copied or manually adjust the exposure. To change the default exposure: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [Exposure Type]. 1 Tap the [Exposure - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 238
original image type key to specify the original type. Toner Save Reduce Toner Consumption Auto Background Adjustment Tap the key matching the original. Manual Text Text/Printed Photo Text/Photo Erase Erase Shadow Around Printed Photo Photo Map Light Original Copy of Copy Copy Original - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 239
or slide the slider to adjust the copy exposure. Toner Save Reduce Toner Consumption Auto Background Adjustment If you adjust the exposure with the original type selected to Manual Text Printed Photo Light Original Text/Printed Photo Photo Text/Photo Map Erase Erase Shadow Around Preview - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 240
, the size must be entered in order to use Auto Image. To change the default ratio: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [Copy Ratio]. 1 Manually select the paper tray, and place the original. Place the original in the document - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 241
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES MANUAL RATIO SELECTION This section explains how to specify any ratio when making a copy on paper that has a size different from the original or changing the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 242
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Using the preset ratio key 1 Tap the [Copy Ratio] key. ► COPY MODE (page 2-3) 2 Copy Ratio Auto Image By Paper Size Original 11x17 Paper 11x17 100 ( 25~200 ) % Slightly Reduce (3% Reduction) 8½x11 8½x11 Tap to set the ratio. After the settings - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 243
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Specifying the image dimensions 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. ► CHANGING MODES (page 1-19) 2 Tap the [Copy Ratio] key. 3 Copy Ratio Zoom 64% 11x17->8 1/2x11 8 1/2x11->5 1/2x8 1/2 77% 11x17->8 1/2x14 8 1/2x14->8 1/2x11 Other Ratio - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 244
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES ENLARGING/REDUCING THE LENGTH AND WIDTH SEPARATELY This section explains how to individually specify the horizontal and vertical copy ratios. When 50% is selected for the horizontal ratio and 70% is selected for the vertical ratio 50% 70% The following two - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 245
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Using the preset ratio key 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. ► CHANGING MODES (page 1-19) 2 Tap the [Copy Ratio] key, and then tap the [XY Zoom] tab. 3 Copy Ratio Zoom No. of copies 1 XY Zoom Auto Image Y 100 ( 25~200 ) % 50% 141% - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 246
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Specifying the image dimensions 1 Perform steps 1 to 2 in Using the preset ratio key (page 2-23). 2 Tap the [by Size] key. 3 Copy Ratio No. of copies 1 Original Change Size/Direction. Paper Select Change Paper Feed Tray Specify the X and Y dimensions - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 247
FOR MAKING COPIES SELECTING THE ORIENTATION AND SIZE OF THE ORIGINAL When the original size is a non-standard size or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size. Set the orientation of the image to ensure that the orientation of the placed original is correctly recognized. • Set - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 248
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 5 Original No. of copies 1 Image Orientation Auto 8½x11 AB Inch Direct Entry Custom Size 5 ½x8 ½ 8 ½x11R 11x17 5 ½x8 ½R 8 ½x11 8 ½x13 8 ½x14 8 ½x13 2/5 Others 3 8½x14 4 11x17 8½x11 2-Sided Copy Background Adjustment Blank Page Skip Skip - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 249
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES Store the frequently used non-standard original sizes. This section explains how to store, retrieve, change, and delete non-standard original sizes. • The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 250
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 5 Original Store/Delete No. of copies 1 2-Sided Copy Background Adjustment Tap a key ( ) for storing a custom original size. Blank Page Skip Select the size key to store/delete the custom original size. Skip Blank Page in Original Copy Ratio Tap a - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 251
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Retrieving a stored original size 1 Perform steps 1 to 3 in Storing original sizes (Modify/Delete) (page 2-30)/ 2 Original No. of copies 1 Image Orientation Store/Delete Original Size 2-Sided Copy Tap the key of the original size that you wish to - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 252
use of the bypass tray when making 2-sided copies. The bypass tray is often used to feed label sheets, transparency film, and other special media for which 2-sided copying is prohibited. If a sheet of one of these special media enters the reversing unit, a misfeed or damage to the unit may result - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 253
detects the appropriate inch paper size CA Preview Copies 1 Start when loading paper such as 8-1/2"x11". • [Size Set] key: Tap this key to manually specify the paper size that is not detected automatically. • [Direct Entry] key: Tap this key to enter a numeric value for the size of the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 254
the output destination of copies. You can tap the [Output] key in normal mode to configure settings for all output functions. Settings for the staple and punch functions can also be configured from simple mode. Output Output Tray Upper Tray Middle Tray Lower Tray No. of copies Offset Separator - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 255
" sorts the scanned original on a page basis, and outputs them. ► SORT/GROUP SETTING (page 2-38) Staple Each set of copies can be stapled, or the sheets can be folded at the center and stapled. ► Stapling each set of sorted copies (page 2-42) ► Saddle stitching for sorted copies (page 2-43) • The - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 256
28) 2 Tap the [Output] key. 3 No. of copies Output Output Tray Upper Tray Middle Tray Lower Tray Offset Separator Page Sort/Group Auto Staple Sort Group Others Punch Fold 3 8½x14 4 11x17 8½x11 Original Change Size/Direction. 2-Sided Copy N-Up Put Multiple Pages in A Page Margin Shift - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 257
Shift Shift Position to Have Margin After the settings are completed, tap . Lower Tray Offset Separator Page Erase Erase Shadow Around Sort/Group Staple Punch Fold Auto Sort Group Others 3 B4 4 A3 A4 Preview CA Proof Copy Start • You can select the offset output checkbox easy - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 258
2 Staples Stapleless Staple 1 Staples Landscape orientation 2 Staples Stapleless Staple • You can view staple positions on the "PREVIEW SCREEN (page 1-20)". Text will be printed at the preset size regardless of the copy ratio or paper size setting. • To change the default staple position - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 259
Copy Start • If you need to change the output tray, tap the [Output Tray] key and select the output destination before selecting stapling. • If the number of scanned originals exceeds the staple sheet limit, a message is displayed. Tap [Continue] or [Cancel]. [Continue]: Continues sorting without - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 260
] → [Common Settings] → [Copy Settings] or [Device Control], then set the [Automatic Saddle Stitch] check box to .) • If the number of scanned originals exceeds the staple sheet limit, a message is displayed. Tap [Divide], [Continue] or [Cancel]. [Divide]: Divides the pages into sets that can be - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 261
with a finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) installed, all staples will be stapled diagonally. • If the number of scanned originals exceeds the staple sheet limit, a message is displayed. Tap the [Continue] or [Cancel] key. [Continue]: Continues sorting without - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 262
of copies 1 Output Output Tray Upper Tray Middle Tray Lower Tray Offset Output Tray Right Tray Separator Page Sort/Group Staple Punch Fold Off 1 Staple 2 Staples Saddle Stitch Trimmer Setting Original Others 3 B4 4 A3 A4 Original Change Size/Direction. 2-Sided Copy N-Up Put Multiple - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 263
Others 3 8½x14 4 11x17 8½x11 Start • The original will be scanned from the innermost side when folded. • If the number of scanned originals exceeds the staple sheet limit, a message is displayed. Tap the [Divide], [Continue], or [Cancel] key. [Divide]: Divides the pages into sets that can be - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 264
Punch Position Top Right Landscape orientation • To change the default punch settings: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Initial Status Settings] → [Punch]. • Punch positions are linked to staple positions. • You can view punch positions on the "PREVIEW - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 265
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 1 Tap the [Staple / Punch] key. ► COPY MODE (page 2-3) Tap the [Original] key and specify the orientation of the original to have the orientation be correctly recognized. ► Specifying the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 266
Saddle stitch finisher (large stacker): 12" × 18", 11" × 17", 8-1/2" × 14", 8-1/2" × 13-1/2", 8-1/2" × 13-2/5", 8-1/2" × 13", 8-1/2" × 11"R, A3W, A3, B4, A4R,, 8K Print Side Inside Outside Fold Orientation - - Folding image AA BB BB AA BB BBA ABA A Inside - AB B A Half Fold 8-1/2" × 11 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 267
C A C A COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Folding types Usable paper Print Side Fold Orientation Folding image C-Fold Open Right Inside Open Left 8-1/2" × 11"R, A4R Open Right Outside Open Left ABC ABC A ABC C ABC C - Accordion Fold 8-1/2" × 11"R, - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 268
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Folding types Usable paper Print Side Fold Orientation Folding image Double Fold 8-1/2" × 11"R, A4R Inside Open Right Open Left ABCD A ABCD AD AD D Open Right Double Fold 8-1/2" × 11"R, A4R Outside - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 269
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES • To change the default fold setting: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings and tab paper cannot be used. • The paper folding function cannot be used with the staple and hole punch function. However, it can be used with them if the paper size - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 270
that are folded every set. For example, heavy paper is folded on a three-sheet basis. Half Fold Specify "Print Side". Output Output Tray Detail (Half Fold) Print Side Inside No. of copies Outside Original Change Size/Direction. 2-Sided Copy N-Up Put Multiple Pages in A Page Margin Shift Shift - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 271
Output Image Others 3 8½x14 4 11x17 8½x11 Preview CA Proof Copy Start Double Fold Specify "Print Side" and "Fold Orientation". No. of copies 1 Output Output Tray Detail (Double Fold) Print Side Inside Fold Orientation Open Right Outside Open Left Original Image Output Image Others - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 272
Inserting separator pages before and after a job Insert Before Job 1212 Insert After Job 12121212 • Even when this function is enabled, the Sort/Group, Staple, Punch, Z-Fold, and Half Fold functions are not applied to separator pages. • This function cannot be used with the saddle stitch or fold - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 273
FOR MAKING COPIES 3 No. of copies 1 Output Output Tray Upper Tray Middle Tray Lower Tray Offset Output Tray Right Tray Separator Page Sort/Group Staple Punch Fold Auto Sort Group Others 3 B4 4 A3 A4 Original Change Size/Direction. 2-Sided Copy N-Up Put Multiple Pages in A Page Margin - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 274
. 2-Up copying 4-Up copying A B AB ABCD AB CD When inserting a cover sheet, select Cover Setting to copy only a front sheet to one page and collectively copy the second and subsequent pages. Configure default settings for N-Up In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Copy - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 275
the [Off] key. • To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap [Border], and select the border. A line can be inserted between pages arranged on a sheet. After the settings are completed, tap twice, and [Back] keys in sequence. 7 Tap the [Start] key to start copying. 2-56 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 276
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES COPYING EACH FACING PAGE OF A BOUND DOCUMENT (DUAL PAGE COPY) This function copies the left and right half of an original successively. This function is useful when making copies of the facing pages of a book or other bound document. Copying the facing pages - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 277
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 3 Place the original on the document glass. ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-133) Size mark Align the center of the original with the appropriate size mark . Centerline of B4 Centerline of A3 Centerline of original original 11" x 17" original The page on - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 278
on separate sheets. This function is convenient for making copies for identification purposes and helps save paper. Front Back Example of an 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size landscape copy Example of an 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size portrait copy To change the default original size during Card Shot: In "Settings - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 279
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 4 Place a card face down on the document glass, and tap the [Start] key. ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-133) 5 Place a card face up on the document glass, and tap the [Start] key to scan the reverse side. • Copy settings cannot be changed when scanning - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 280
a repeat count, original size, and paper size to copy images on a sheet, the copy ratio is calculated automatically and the original is copied. This function glass for photo repeating. • Repeat Layout can be combined with Staple / Punch or Saddle Stitch. • This function cannot be combined with - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 281
necessary. Photo Repeat Copy Ratio Parting Line Off 100% Preview CA Proof Copy ► SELECTING THE ORIENTATION AND SIZE OF THE ORIGINAL (page 2-28) ► MANUAL RATIO SELECTION (page 2-22) Back 3 8½x14 4 11x17 8½x11 Start ► SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 2-11) Set so that there are - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 282
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES 7 Tap the [Start] key to start copying. Copy by specifying a repeat count (Fixed Repeat) 1 Perform steps 1 to 3 in Copy by automatically calculating the repeat count (Auto Repeat) (page 2-62). 2 Tap the [Fixed Repeat] key. 3 Tap the [Original] and [ - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 283
COPIER►BASIC PROCEDURE FOR MAKING COPIES Repeat a photo size original in actual size (Photo Repeat) 1 Perform steps 2 to 3 in Copy by automatically calculating the repeat count (Auto Repeat) (page 2-62). 2 Tap the [Photo Repeat] key. 3 Place the original on the document glass. 4 Tap the [ - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 284
a booklet. This function is convenient for arranging copies into an attractive booklet or pamphlet. Booklet copy using 8 original pages Originals Staple to create a booklet 2 3 4 Binding side 5 6 7 Left Binding 5 4 7 2 7 3 5 3 5 4 7 2 57 Right Binding 5 4 7 2 7 3 5 2-65 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 285
adjusted by the machine. Four original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper. Blank pages will be automatically produced at the end of ] key and then the [Booklet] key, or tap the [Output] key and then [Staple] tab and [Saddle Stitch] key. 3 Select the binding edge. To cancel the booklet - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 286
on the tray selection screen. For more information, see "SELECTING THE PAPER TRAY FOR COPYING (page 2-11)". • If the cover will be copied on, label sheets, transparency film, and tab paper cannot be used. • To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. 6 Tap the [Start] key to start copying. 2-67 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 287
are available for booklet 2-Up or 4-Up. Paper size: 12"x 18", 11"x 17", 8-1/2"x 14", 8-1/2"x 11"R, A3W, A3, B4, A4R, B5R Number of stapled sheets: Max. 15 sheets • Scan the originals in order from the first page to the last page. The order of copying will be automatically adjusted by the machine - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 288
tab paper cannot be used. • To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. 6 Tap [N-Up] on the action panel. 7 Tap the key of the N-Up sheets you wish to use. If needed, the images will be rotated. To cancel the N-Up setting Tap the [Off] key. 8 Select the layout. 2-69 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 289
Proof Copy Start To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap [Border], and select the border. A line can be inserted between pages arranged on a sheet. After the settings are completed, tap twice, and [Back] keys in sequence. 10 Tap the [Start] key to start copying. 2-70 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 290
page Inside of back cover D BC A 4 2 3 1 1 3 • Book Copy must be specified before scanning the original. • Four original pages will be copied onto each sheet of paper. Blank pages will be automatically added at the end if the total number of original pages is not a multiple of four. • This - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 291
step 5. and [Back] keys in 4 When inserting a cover, tap the [Cover Setting] key, and tap the [On] key. To make a copy on the inserted cover sheet, check the [Make Copy on Cover (Duplex)] box so that appears. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. To change the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 292
as a catalogue or a pamphlet page by page, and copies in sequence. • Book Divide must be specified before scanning the original. • This function supports three original binding edges: left binding, right binding, and top open. • The scanned original is split in the center. The document glass is not - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 293
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS PAPER, AND TIME SAVING FUNCTIONS SKIPPING BLANK PAGES IN AN ORIGINAL (BLANK PAGE SKIP) If the scanned original contains blank pages, this function skips them to copy only non-blank pages. The machine detects blank pages, enabling you to skip useless copies without checking an - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 294
4 11x17 8½x11 Check the confirmation message, and tap the [Execute] key to start copying. On the confirmation screen, the number of scanned original sheets appears in (A), the number of scanned sides in (B), and the number of copies excluding blank pages in (C). For example, if five original - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 295
] key. 2 Others Background Adjustment Adjust Original Background Darkness. Off On Original Change Size/Direction. Erase Erase Shadow Around Sharpness Adjust Outline of Image Exposure Select Type/Exposure Back Touch [+] darken background. Touch [-] erase background. 3 8½x14 4 11x17 8½x11 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 296
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-131) ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-133) To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. 4 Tap the [Start] key to - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 297
. However, if proof copy is executed during printing of a job for which both 2-sided printing and staple function are enabled, the proof copy will be printed after the job in progress is finished. If the [Start Print] key is tapped to execute printing of the remaining sets while the machine is - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 298
one set of copies. 5 Original Auto 8½x11 No. of copies 1 Program Registration Register Current Settings Adjust Print Position Check the copy result. If no problem is found, tap the [Start Print] key. Paper Select 2-Sided Copy Auto As necessary, change the settings and repeat proof copying - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 299
of scanned original pages. For example, when 2-sided copying is performed using one original, the number "1" will appear to indicate that one original sheet was scanned, not "2" to indicate the front-side page and the reverse side page. • Original Count must be specified before scanning the original - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 300
and a client machine registered in the master machine performs only printing without scanning the original. Execute 4 sets of copies Master Copy is enabled when specifying copies without stapling. • Tandem Copy is disabled when specifying copies with stapling. As shown here, if Tandem Copy is - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 301
the [Back] key. To cancel the Tandem Copy setting: Tap the [Tandem Copy] key to uncheck it. 3 Original NNoo.. ooff ccooppiieess 1 Send and Print Program Registration Register Current Settings Tap the number of copies key to specify the number of copies. Auto 8½x11 Paper Select Auto Quick - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 302
for the purpose of deterring unauthorized copying. It does not guarantee the prevention of information leakage. • Text may not be completely hidden on an output sheet with a hidden pattern print under certain machine conditions. In such a case, adjust the contrast by selecting the [Hidden Pattern - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 303
to select the [Positive] option for the "Method". 4 Others Hidden Pattern Print Original Change Size/Direction. Stamp Print Date and Stamp Specify each item in the [Print Contents Setting] tab as required. Default Settings Print Contents Setting 2-Sided Copy Off Pre-Set Word DO NOT COPY - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 304
this function is specified together with another image compositing function, trace information is printed at the top. • Trace information is printed at the top or bottom outside an image frame. • The information added at printing or the preview image of the account job ID and date/time are displayed - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 305
cut off. Down Right Left Rotation copy cannot be used in combination with the margin shift function. To change the default margin shift setting: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Initial Margin Shift Setting]. Specify a value from - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 306
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Others Margin Shift Off Right Left Down Back Side 1 Side 2 Original Change Size/Direction. Output 2-Sided Copy Paper Select Change Paper Feed Tray Background Adjustment 10 (0 ~ 2) inch 10 (00~520) ) imncmh Adjust 2nd pg value to 1st. 3 8½x14 4 11x17 8½x11 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 307
only the shadows. • When Erase is selected, the orientation of the original is automatically set to portrait. To change the default erase width setting: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Erase Width Adjustment]. Specify a value from - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 308
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 3 Others Erase Up Clear Outer Frame Booklet Copy Like A Pamphlet Original Change Size/Direction. 2-Sided Copy Background Adjustment Tap the checkbox of the edge that you wish to erase, and specify the erase position. Specify Frame+Center Left Right Reverse erase - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 309
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS COPYING ORIGINALS WITH NO EDGE CUT-OFF (FULL BLEED COPY) This feature lets you copy an entire original to paper larger than the original size with no image cut-off at the edges. The punch function cannot be used. 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Full Bleed Copy] key. " - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 310
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS COPYING IN THE CENTER OF THE PAPER (CENTERING) This function centers the copied image on the paper. This lets you place the image in the center of the paper when the original size is smaller than the paper size or when the image is reduced. Not using the centering function - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 311
you can fine adjust the position. We recommend that you specify the top as the starting side of the original. Originals Position Image is used Printing paper Top edge of paper Position Image is not used 1 Copy the original that you want to use for Move Copy. Copying is performed without - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 312
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Others Position Image Please designate print start position. Clear Original Change Size/Direction. Erase Erase Shadow Around Sets a movement distance. Tap the area indicating the movement distance on the front Side1 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 313
and feeds each set through the automatic document feeder one set at a time when copying a very large number of originals. This saves you the trouble of sorting the copies. When scanning originals that are separated into sets, scan the set that has the first page first. The individual copy settings - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 314
scan and display preview. 1-Sided→1-Sided Copy Ratio Exposure 100% Change Setting 100% Preview Output Change Setting of Following Original Send and Print Program Registration Register Current Settings Quick File Store Data Temporarily File Store Data in Folder Read-End Preview CA N-Up Off - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 315
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS Changing the copy settings for each set of originals As necessary, change copy settings for each set of originals. Perform the steps below before scanning the next set of originals in step 4 of "Copying in job build mode (page 2-94)". A [Separator Page] setting cannot be - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 316
for each original according to the selected paper size, enabling printing on a uniform paper size. Originals Copy 8-1/2" x 14" 14" (B4) size original is enlarged to 11" x 17" (A3) size for printing. There are two settings for mixed size originals. Same Width Use this setting for originals - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 317
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS • When [Different Width] is selected, the staple function cannot be used. • The mixed size original function cannot be used to copy originals that are the same size but are placed in different - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 318
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING THIN ORIGINALS (SLOW SCAN MODE) When you wish to scan thin originals using the automatic document feeder, you can use this function, which helps prevent thin originals from misfeeding. ABC D ABCD Slow Scan Mode must be specified before scanning the original. The - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 319
Change Size/Direction. Exposure Select Type/Exposure Toner Save Reduce Toner Consumption Background Adjustment Erase Erase Shadow Around x 600 dpi (high quality mode). When high quality mode is used, fine print and thin lines are reproduced with greater clarity, however, the scanning speed is slower - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 320
pre-set text or any characters as the text. Each of the items above can be printed on the header or footer of each sheet. DRAFT Specification 2015.12 Confidential 5/45 • If the selected stamp content of one position overlaps the stamp content of another position, priority will be given - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 321
document glass. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-131) ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-133) 2 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Stamp] key. 3 Tap a tab to be printed, and tap the format. The format of the [Text] tab can be entered using pre-set text or soft keyboard. ► Setting using the [Text] tab - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 322
Original Change Size/Direction. Custom Image Combine Registered Images Pattern Print Prevent Unauthorized Copy 2-Sided Copy N-Up Put Multiple Pages in ] key allows you to select the required one of the registered formats for printing. Tapping the [Store/Delete] key allows you to edit, delete, or - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 323
. Makes a stamp copy as normal. Based on the tandem copy. Based on the custom image setting. Printing does not take place on separator pages. Makes a stamp copy as normal. Makes a stamp copy by sheet. Makes a stamp copy as normal. Makes a stamp copy as normal regardless of image shift setting. Makes - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 324
. Makes a stamp copy under a tracking information print. Cannot be combined. Prints an image at the original position regardless of the Position Image setting. Makes a stamp copy by sheet. • An image must be registered in advance from the printer driver to the machine. ► REGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGE - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 325
CA Proof Copy Start • To cancel the custom image setting: Tap the [Off] key. • To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Set [Print Page] or [Print Position]. After the settings are completed, tap sequence. and [Back] keys in 6 Tap the [Start] key to start copying. For settings related to - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 326
job. It is helpful when you want to change cover paper to make resources look better. Configure insertion sheet settings if needed. • To insert insertion sheets, see "INSERTING INSERTION SHEETS IN COPIES (COVERS/INSERTS) (page 2-115)". • For N-Up, the layout is based on the first page and excludes - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 327
for back cover. 2 2 2 2-sided copying of 1-sided originals Setting conditions for each cover Front Cover Back Cover Resulting copies Not copied Not copied 1 3 5 6 4 Inserts cover sheets at the beginning and end of copies. 2-108 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 328
2 5 6 Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for front cover, and also makes a 1-sided copy on the sixth original page. Inserts cover sheets at the end of copies. 2-sided copy Not copied 6 4 1 3 5 2 Makes a 2-sided copy on the first and second original pages for front cover, and - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 329
of 2-sided originals Setting conditions for each cover Front Cover Back Cover Resulting copies Not copied Not copied 1 2 3 4 5 6 Inserts cover sheets at the beginning and end of copies. 1-sided copy Not copied 1 2 3 5 4 6 Makes a 1-sided copy on the first original page for - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 330
pages for back cover. Setting conditions for each cover Front Cover Back Cover Resulting copies 2 4 4 6 6 Not copied Not copied 1 3 5 Inserts cover sheets at the beginning and end of copies. 1 3 5 1-sided copy Not copied 2-sided copy Not copied Makes a 1-sided copy on the first - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 331
the number of copies and any other desired copy settings. When these settings have been completed, perform the procedure to select covers/inserts. • One sheet can be inserted for each of front and back covers. • The document glass is not available for this function. • When performing 2-sided copying - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 332
Cancel All Original Change Size/Direction. N-Up Put Multiple Pages in A Page Configure copy setting of a front cover sheet. Front Cover Setting Paper Tray Bypass Plain 1 Print on Front Cover Make No Copy Simplex 2-Sided Copy Output Margin Shift Shift Position to Have Margin Preview CA Proof - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 333
, and tab paper cannot be used. If not copied on, tab paper can be inserted. • To cancel cover sheet insertion: Tap the [Off] key. • To cancel the front cover, back cover, and insertion sheet settings at the same time: Tap the [Cancel All] key. • To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 334
Example: Insert A after page 3 and insert B after page 5. Originals 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 Insert A 3 4 5 Insert B 6 Copy Sheet inserting examples The following examples show the copy results when insertion sheets are inserted into six 1-sided originals or three 2-sided originals using two - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 335
copy settings. When these settings have been completed, perform the procedure to select covers/inserts. • The insertion sheet size must be the same as the copy size. • Up to 100 insertion sheets can be inserted. • The document glass is not available for this function. • Take care that two insertion - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 336
the automatic document feeder. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-131) 2 Tap the [Others] key, and then tap the [Covers/Inserts] key. 3 Tap the [Insertion Sheet] tab. 4 Tap the [Insertion Type A] key, and tap the insert page display key. The Insertion Type B to Type H settings are the same as - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 337
paper, tap the [Tab Copy] key. ► COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER (TAB COPY) (page 2-122) • When copying on both sides of an insertion sheet, you cannot use label sheets, transparency films, or tab paper for insertion. If not copied on, tab paper can be inserted. • To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 338
Shift Shift Position to Have Margin Preview CA Proof Copy Start Tap the [Page Layout] key. If the settings for the covers or insertion sheets are not configured, the [Page Layout] key is disabled. 3 Others Covers/Inserts Cancel All Replace Order of Inserts Output Check the page layout. To - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 339
sheet of paper between each sheet of transparency film, making the sheets easy to handle. It is also possible to copy on insertion sheets 4. When loading paper in the bypass tray, load with the print side down. In tray 4, load with the print side up. ► MAKING COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY (page 2- - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 340
the transparency inserts setting: Tap the [Off] key. • To cancel all settings: Tap the [CA] key. Tap the [On] key. When making a copy on insertion sheets, tap the [Also Make Copy on Inserts] checkbox to set to . After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. 5 Tap the [Start - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 341
FOR SPECIFIC USES COPYING CAPTIONS ONTO TAB PAPER (TAB COPY) Load a tab sheet in the bypass tray, and make a copy on a tab. Prepare appropriate Document glass Load the tab paper so that the tab on the first sheet is toward you. 1 Place so that the side with the tab text is on the left. Tray - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 342
away from you. Tray 4 Side 1 Place the first sheet of tab paper so that the tab faces toward you. Tab Copy must be specified before scanning the original. To change the default image shift width for tab copying: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Condition - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 343
Start To cancel the tab copy setting: Tap the [Off] key. 4 Load the tab paper. When using the bypass tray, place the paper with the print Side 2 side down. Place the paper so that the sides with the tabs enter the machine last. After loading tab paper into the bypass tray - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 344
trailing edges of each copy. • The paper size, number of sheets required for the enlarged image, and the ratio are automatically selected based original size and enlargement size. (The paper size and ratio cannot be selected manually.) 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Multi-Page Enlargement] - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 345
Position Mark Back 34x44 (11x17x8) 44x68 3 8½x14 4 11x17 8½x11 Preview CA Proof Copy Start When printing the copy image and margin border, set the [Print Paste Position Mark] checkbox to . • To cancel Multi-Page Enlargement setting: Tap the [Clear] key. Even when the multi-page enlargement - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 346
COPIER►OTHER FUNCTIONS COPYING WITH MIRROR IMAGE (MIRROR IMAGE) This function makes copies by inverting the original into a mirror image. Originals Specify the Mirror Image before scanning an original. Mirror image copy 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Mirror Image] key. A checkmark appears - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 347
be used for black and white copying. Originals with large black areas (which use a large amount of toner) can be copied using Black/White Reverse to reduce toner consumption. Originals B/W reverse copy • B/W Reverse must be specified before scanning the original. • When this function is selected - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 348
. Original Change Size/Direction. Exposure Select Type/Exposure Tap or slide the slider to adjust the image quality. Off 1 2 3 On Smooth Sharp After the settings are completed, tap sequence. and [Back] keys in Touch [+] to sharpen and [-] to smoothen overall thickness and outline. Back - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 349
Back 3 8½x14 4 11x17 8½x11 Preview CA Proof Copy Start To cancel the sharpness setting: Tap the [Off] key. Tap or slide the slider to adjust the sharpness. Select [More Sharp] for sharper outlines, or [Less Sharp] for softer outlines. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 350
adjust all three density ranges at once. Black+ Gray Balance must be specified before scanning the original. To change the default gray balance setting: Change the setting in "Settings (administrator)" → [System Settings] → [Image Quality Adjustment] → [Copy Image Quality]→ [Gray Balance]. 1 Tap - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 351
NNoo.. ooff ccooppiieess 1 LINE PRINTER Job Status Tray 1 Cancel Print Send and Print Quick File Store Data Temporarily File Store Data in Folder Call to display the user authentication screen. Enter the login name and password to perform user authentication. 2 Place the original. Place the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 352
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS 3 Configure copy settings. To cancel interrupt copy, tap the [Cancel] key. 4 Tap the [Start] key to start interrupt copying. When the interrupt copy job is completed, the interrupted job will resume. The interrupt copy function does not display the preview of - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 353
Store Data in Folder Call Eco Program Plain 1 8½x11 1 2 8½x11 8½x11 5 3 8½x14 4 11x17 8½x11 Preview CA Proof Copy Start Tap [Send and Print] on the action panel. 3 Address Sort BBB AAA CCC AAA BBB Cancel and Return Add New A D G J M P CA Select a recipient from the address - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 354
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS 5 Set each copy item as required. These copy settings are used for fax transmission. However, some settings may be unavailable depending on the function. You can preview the scanned original by tapping the [Preview] key. 6 Tap the [Start] key to start copying. - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 355
2-Sided Copy 1-Sided→1-Sided Copy Ratio 100% Exposure Auto Output N-Up Off Others HDD File retrieve NNoo.. ooff ccooppiieess Sharp OSA 1 LINE PRINTER Job Status Send and Print Quick File Store Data Temporarily File Store Data in Folder Call Eco Program Plain 1 8½x11 1 2 8½x11 8½x11 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 356
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS PROGRAMS Programs are set from the base screen of normal mode. ► SELECTING COPY MODE (page 2-4) Programs cannot be stored in easy mode. Disabling of Registration/Deletion of Program In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [ - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 357
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS • Up to 48 programs can be stored. • Program settings remains registered even when the main power has been turned off. • A program can also be stored in the home screen or favorite as a shortcut; therefore, it is helpful when retrieving it. 1 Specify the copy - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 358
8½x14 4 11x17 8½x11 CA Start To specify print settings, you can select the required one from pre-set text or use the • If user authentication is disabled, the administrator password entry screen appears. When the administrator password is entered, the registration is completed. The number - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 359
COPIER►CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS 2 No. of copies 1 Call Program Call registered settings when touched. Pre-Setting Program 01 01 02 02 03 03 05 05 04 04 06 06 07 07 09 09 08 08 10 10 Others 3 8½x14 4 11x17 8½x11 Change Name Delete Register in Favorite Register for Home Preview CA - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 360
3-10 • SAVING SETTINGS AT THE TIME OF PRINTING 3-10 • USING SAVED SETTINGS 3-11 • CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER DEFAULT SETTINGS 3-12 PRINTING IN A Mac OS ENVIRONMENT BASIC PRINTING PROCEDURE 3-13 • SELECTING THE PAPER 3-14 PRINTING WHEN THE USER AUTHENTICATION FUNCTION IS ENABLED 3-15 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 361
THE SAME IMAGE IN TILE PATTERN (REPEAT PRINT 3-68 • PRINTING PATTERN DATA (HIDDEN PATTERN PRINT 3-69 • CHANGING THE RENDERING METHOD AND PRINTING JPEG IMAGES (USE DRIVER TO RENDER JPEGS 3-71 • MAXIMIZING THE PRINT AREA ON THE PAPER (PRINT AREA 3-72 CONVENIENT PRINTER FUNCTIONS • USING TWO - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 362
Setup Guide. • The User's Manual mainly uses PCL6 printer driver screens to explain how to print in a Windows environment. The printer driver screens may differ slightly depending on the printer driver you are using. Mac OS Environment Printer driver type PS PS This printer driver supports the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 363
machine name that normally appears in the [Printer] menu is [MX-xxxx]. ("xxxx" is a sequence of characters that varies depending on the machine model.) 1 Select [Print] from the [File] menu of WordPad. 2 Select the printer driver for the machine and click the [Preferences] button. The button - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 364
click the desired tab and then select the settings. ► PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS SCREEN / REFERRING TO HELP (page 3-6) • If an original size larger than the largest paper size that the machine supports is set, select the paper size for printing in "Output Size". • If an "Output Size" different from the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 365
paper used for printing, and the paper tray. Select a finishing function such as stapling, punch, or folding default state. (4) Setup Items Displays the settings on each tab. (5) Information icon( ) Some restrictions exist on the combinations of settings that can be selected in the printer driver - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 366
paper of the size specified in "Output Size" is automatically selected. (The factory default setting is plain paper only.) • When "Paper Type" is set to anything Settings] is enabled, printing will not take place if the paper size or paper type specified in the printer driver is different from the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 367
not stored in the machine: In "Settings (administrator)", select [User Control] → [Default Settings] → [Disable Printing by Invalid User]. 1 In the printer driver properties window of the application, select the printer driver of the machine and click the [Preferences] button. The button that is - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 368
performed by login (3) name/password, click [Login Name/Password] and enter your login name and password. Enter the password using 1 to 32 characters appear before printing starts, select the [Auto Job Control Review] checkbox. (4) Click the [OK] button to execute printing. Authentication by - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 369
step 2 of "USING SAVED SETTINGS (page 3-11)", select the user settings that you want to delete and click the [Delete] button. 1 Select the machine's printer driver from the print window of the application, and click the [Preferences] button. The button that is used to open the printer - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 370
You can specify the saved favorites through just one click to apply frequently used settings or complicated settings to your printing. 1 Select the machine's printer driver from the print window of the application, and click the [Preferences] button. The button that is used to open the printer - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 371
WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT CHANGING THE PRINTER DRIVER DEFAULT SETTINGS You can change the default settings of the printer driver. Changes you have made in the printer driver properties window when you execute printing from the application are returned to the default settings specified here when you exit - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 372
printer driver and configure settings in a Mac OS environment, see the Software Setup Guide. • The menu used to execute printing may drivers appear as a list, select the name of the printer driver to be used from the list. 2 Select paper settings. (1) (1) Make sure that the correct printer is MX - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 373
Bypass Tray] (disabled by factory default) or [Enable Selected Paper Type in Bypass Tray] (enabled by factory default), which you can reach by Tray Settings] is enabled, printing will not take place if the paper size or paper type specified in the printer driver is different from the paper - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 374
IS ENABLED The user information (such as login name and password) that must be entered varies depending on the authentication method being used, so check with the administrator of the machine before printing. The menu used to execute printing may vary depending on the application. To prohibit - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 375
authentication is carried out using the login (5) name/password, enter your login name in "Login Name" and your password (1 to 32 characters) in "Password". • When authentication is carried out using the user file name set in the application will appear. (6) Click the [Print] button. 3-16 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 376
USED FUNCTIONS SELECTING THE RESOLUTION The following three selections are available for "Print Mode" (resolution): 600 dpi This mode is suitable for printing data such as regular text or a table. 600 dpi (High Quality) The print quality of photos and text are high. 1200 dpi Select this mode - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 377
(1) (2) (3) (1) Click the [Main] tab. (2) Select the paper orientation. (3) Select [Long Edge] or [Short Edge]. If necessary, you can select the method of implementing 2-sided printing. Click the [Other Settings] button on the [Detailed Settings] tab, and select the mode from "Duplex Style". 3-18 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 378
machine. This function is convenient when enlarging a letter or A4 size document to ledger or A3 size to make it easier to view, or when printing a document on paper that is different in size from the original document. Letter (A4) Ledger (A3) If A0, A1, or A2 size is selected in - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 379
FUNCTIONS Windows (1) (2) (3) (1) Click the [Main] tab. (2) Select the original size from [Original Size] (for example: Letter). (3) Select the actual paper size to be used for printing from [Output Size] (for example: Ledger). If the output size is larger than the original size, the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 380
image in the printer driver properties window. • In a Mac OS environment, the page orders are displayed as selections. • In a Mac OS environment, the number of pages that can be printed on a single sheet is 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16. Printing 8 pages on one sheet is not supported. • For information on the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 381
[N-Up with cover] checkbox ( ). (PCL6 only) • When [100% N-Up] is selected ( ) for jobs such as N-Up copying of two A4 size pages onto one A3 sheet, the pages will be printed at the full size of the original. If you select [Border] at this time, only the border will be - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 382
blank pages, the blank pages are skipped during printing. The machine detects blank pages and does not print them. This eliminates unnecessary printing without you having to check for blank pages before printing. Blank page Print Do not print blank pages This function is available in a Windows - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 383
), saddle stitch finisher or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker). • For the maximum number of sheets that can be stapled, see "SPECIFICATIONS" in the Start Guide. • The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled at once includes any covers and/or inserts that are inserted. • For information on - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 384
function, select the type of punch in the "Punch" menu and the punch position in the "Position" menu. In addition to the [Finishing] tab, [Staple] can also be set on the [Main] tab. Mac OS (1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Printer Features] and then select [Output]. (2) Select "Binding Edge". (3) Select the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 385
A PAMPHLET (BOOKLET/SADDLE STITCH) The pamphlet function prints on the front and back of each sheet of paper so that the sheets can be folded and bound to create a pamphlet. If a saddle finisher is installed and if "Booklet" and "Staple" are selected, this function automatically folds and outputs - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 386
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS If a saddle stitch finisher is installed (4) (5) (4) Click the [Finishing] tab. (5) Select [Saddle Stitch] from "Staple". When a saddle finisher (large capacity) is installed and the job is not output correctly with [Saddle Stitch], select [Saddle Stitch ( - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 387
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS TRIMMING THE EXCESS OF FOLDED PAPER If a trimmer unit is installed, you can trim off excess edges of paper for a finer finish. Windows (3) (1) (2) (1) Click - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 388
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Mac OS (1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Trimming]. (2) Set the [Trimming] checkbox to . (3) Specify the trimming width. 3-29 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 389
can also be used together. This is convenient when you wish to staple or punch the output but the binding area overlaps the text. By shifting the image, the part of the image that is outside the print area will not be printed. Windows (1) (3) (4) (2) (1) Click the [Layout] tab. (2) Click the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 390
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Mac OS (1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Printer Features] and then select [Output]. (2) Select "Binding Edge". (3) Select "Margin Shift". 3-31 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 391
can then be attached together to create a large poster. To enable precise alignment of the edges of the sheets during attachment, borderlines can be printed or overlapping edges can be created (overlap function). This function is available in a Windows environment. Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 392
TO ADJUST THE SIZE AND ORIENTATION OF THE IMAGE ADJUST PRINT POSITION ON ODD AND EVEN PAGES SEPARATELY (PRINT POSITION) This function sets different print positions (margins) separately for odd and even pages and prints the pages. This function is available in a Windows environment. Windows - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 393
IMAGE 180 DEGREES (ROTATE 180 DEGREES) This feature rotates the image 180 degrees so that it can be printed correctly on paper that can be loaded in only one orientation (such as paper with punch holes). ABCD Windows ABCD (1) (2) (1) Click the [Main] tab. (2) Select [ - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 394
FUNCTIONS ENLARGING/REDUCING THE PRINT IMAGE (ZOOM SETTING/ENLARGE OR REDUCE) This function enlarges or reduces the image to a selected percentage. This allows you to enlarge a small image or add margins to the paper by slightly reducing an image. When using the PS printer driver (Windows), you can - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 395
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Mac OS (1) (2) (1) Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu and enter the ratio (%). (2) Click the [OK] button. 3-36 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 396
width as necessary. • This function is available in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used. • When printing from an application that processes lines as raster graphics, line widths cannot be adjusted. Windows (1) (3) (2) (1) Click the [Image Quality - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 397
lines in Excel When fine border lines in Excel do not print correctly, you can make the lines thicker. • This function is available in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used. • Normally this setting is not necessary. Windows (1) (3) (2) (1) Click the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 398
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Adjusting the thickness of text and lines You can make text and lines thicker or thinner. You can also make edges smoother or sharper. - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 399
to create a mirror image. This function is conveniently used to print a design for a woodblock print or other printing medium. B In a Windows environment, this function is only available when using the PS printer driver. Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) If you wish to - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 400
ADJUST THE BRIGHTNESS AND CONTRAST OF THE IMAGE (IMAGE ADJUSTMENT) This function adjusts the brightness and contrast in the print settings when a photo or other image is printed. This function makes simple corrections even if image editing software is not installed on your computer. This function is - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 401
in black. This function allows you to bring out color text and lines that are faint and difficult to see when printed in grayscale. ABCD ABCD • Raster data such as bitmap images cannot be adjusted. • This function is available in a Windows environment. Windows (1) (2) (1) Click the [Image - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 402
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS SELECTING IMAGE SETTINGS TO MATCH THE IMAGE TYPE Preset settings are available in the machine's printer driver for specific preferences, according to the appropriate image processing method. Sharpness This setting creates a sharper image with clear outlines, - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 403
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Mac OS (1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Printer Features]. (2) Click the [Advanced2] tab. (3) Specify the settings. 3-44 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 404
PAGES (WATERMARK) This function adds faint shadow-like text as a watermark in the background of the printed image. The size and angle of the watermark text can be adjusted. The watermark text can be selected from the previously registered text in the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 405
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Mac OS (1) (2) (1) Select [Watermarks]. (2) Click the [Watermark] checkbox and configure watermark settings. • Configure detailed watermark settings such as selection of the text. • Adjust the size and angle of the text by dragging the slide bar . 3-46 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 406
a frequently used image or an icon of your own creation as if it is stamped on the print data. The size, position, and angle of the image can be adjusted. MEMO This function is available in a Windows environment. Windows (1) MEMO (3) (2) (1) Click the [Stamp] - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 407
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS REGISTERING A CUSTOM IMAGE This function registers images used as custom images from the printer driver to the machine. • This function is available in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used. To prohibit the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 408
file and registering the data as an overlay file, an attractive print result can be easily obtained without the need for complex manipulations. environment. Windows Creating an overlay file (4) (2) (3) (1) Open the driver properties window from the application that is used for creating overlay data. - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 409
clicked. • When you click the [Open] button, the existing overlay file is registered. Printing with an overlay file (2) (3) (1) Open the driver properties window from the application that is used for printing with an overlay file. (2) Click the [Stamp] tab. (3) Select an overlay file. A previously - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 410
NUMBER OF COPIES (COPIES STAMP) You can add the number of copies to the header or footer of the print data. You can also set a copies number and print position. This function is available in a Windows environment. (1) (2) (3) (1) Click the [Stamp] tab. (2) Click the [Copies Stamp] button. (3) Select - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 411
paper or a different paper type at specified pages. As necessary, paper can be inserted as insertion sheets where nothing is printed. 1 2 3 4 5 In a Mac OS environment The front and back covers are printed using paper that is different from the other pages. This function can be used, for example - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 412
Page] is selected for "Insert Position", specify the insert position by directly entering a page number. When "Printing Method" is set to [2-Sided Printing], the specified page and the next page after it will be printed on the front and reverse side of the paper, and thus an insert setting at a page - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 413
of transparency film from sticking together by inserting a sheet of paper between each sheet of film. As necessary, the same content as that printed on each sheet of transparency film is also printed on the corresponding sheet of inserted paper. Windows AB C (1) (2) (1) Click the [Finishing - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 414
, and paper type for the front and back covers. (7) Select the transparency insert settings. When the [Printed] checkbox is selected to set to , the same content as that printed on the transparency film is also printed on the insert. Select the paper source and type if needed. Set the paper type of - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 415
page position in "Insert Position". • To add a separator page each time printing of the set number of copies is completed, select [Per Copies] in "Insert Position". • For example, if you are printing 10 copies and you select "5", a separator page will be added after the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 416
. If plain paper is loaded into tray 1 and recycled paper is loaded into tray 2 as necessary, selecting Carbon Copy simultaneously prints one copy for presentation and one copy as a duplicate. A AAA This function is available in a Windows environment. Windows (3) (1) (2) (1) Click the [Inserts - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 417
paper in an application, and set the test shifting distance in [Print Position] on the [Layout] tab of the printer driver property window. The text will be printed on the tabs. Tab Paper Print (for PCL6 only) Tab sheets are printed while they are inserted between the desired pages. Select [Tab Paper - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 418
on tab papers in an application, take the following steps: (6) (1) (3) (4) (5) (2) (1) Click the [Layout] tab. (2) Click the [Print Position] button. (3) Select [Tab Shift]. (4) Specify the distance of shifting the image by directly entering a value or by clicking the button. (5) Click the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 419
from "Output Size". (4) Select the page settings. Specify the pages where you wish to insert tab paper and enter the text that you wish to print on the tabs. Also select the font and adjust the layout. • Tab paper can be loaded into tray 4 and the bypass tray. • To select [Tab - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 420
side of the next sheet even if it would normally be printed on the reverse side of the paper. Example: When pages 4 and 8 are specified as page settings. (Back is blank) • This function is available in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used. Windows - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 421
size paper to the 8-1/2" × 11" (A4) size to adjust the width of the actual print paper to the 8-1/2" × 11" (A4) size. When necessary, you can staple folded sheets. To use the Half Fold and Saddle Fold (Staple) functions, you need to mount a saddle stitch finisher. Types of paper folding functions - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 422
Folding types Print Side Fold Orientation Folding results Description Open Right ABC C C-Fold Inside Open Left Outside Open Right Open Left ABC ABC A For example, paper is folded in three so that it can be put into an envelope. Copies C are output sheet by sheet. A ABC - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 423
folded in four so that it can be put into an envelope. Copies are output sheet by sheet. DA Z-Fold - Open Right ABCD Open Left ABCD AB D CD A For example, if 8-1/2" × 11" (A4) and 11" × 17" (A3) size print images are mixed, only the 11" × 17" (A3) size paper is folded and changed - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 424
Settings] in "Settings (administrator)" → [Device Control] → [Disabling of Duplex] is selected. • When printing data in a pamphlet layout, the "Booklet" function can be used to conveniently fold and staple printed output to create a pamphlet. See "CREATE A PAMPHLET (BOOKLET/SADDLE STITCH) (page 3-26 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 425
PRINTER►CONVENIENT PRINTING FUNCTIONS Mac OS Folding (1) (2) (3) (1) Select [Printer Features]. (2) Select [Folding]. (3) Select the desired folding method. Folding(Z-Fold) (1) (2) (1) Select [Printer Features], then select [Folding(Z-Fold)]. (2) Configure Fold settings. 3-66 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 426
) This function inserts a preset data item into every page during printing. You can easily create documents with opened page spread that is in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used. Windows You have to create page data to be inserted in advance. - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 427
IN TILE PATTERN (REPEAT PRINT) This function prints the same image in tile pattern on a sheet. This is useful for producing name cards and stickers. • This function is available in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used. Windows (1) (2) (1) Click - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 428
PRINTING FUNCTIONS PRINTING PATTERN DATA (HIDDEN PATTERN PRINT) This function prints pattern data such as "DO NOT COPY" behind the print in a Windows environment. • This function can be used when the PCL6 printer driver is used. Windows (1) (3) (2) (1) Click the [Stamp] tab. (2) Click the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 429
prevention of information leakage. • Text may not be completely hidden on an output sheet with a pattern print under certain machine conditions. In "Settings (administrator)", select [Security Settings] → [Hidden Pattern Print Setting] → [Contrast] if this is the case. • The hidden pattern may not - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 430
or the machine. • This function is available in a Windows environment. • When images are rendered in the printer driver, it may take time until the printing is completed. Windows (1) (3) (2) (4) (1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) Click the [Other Settings] button. (3) Click the [Use - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 431
on the full paper size. This function is available in a Windows environment. Even when the print area is maximized, edges may be cut off. Windows (1) (3) (2) (4) (1) Click the [Detailed Settings] tab. (2) Click the [Other Settings] button. (3) Select [Maximum] from the "Printable Area". (4) - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 432
four sets of copies 2 sets of copies 2 sets of copies To use the tandem print function, the IP address of the client machine must be registered in the printer driver. • In a Windows environment, this is accomplished automatically by clicking the [Auto Configuration] button on the [Configuration - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 433
want to use Tandem Print function?". Mac OS (1) (2) (1) Select [Tandem Print]. (2) Click the [Tandem Print] checkbox so that appears. To use the tandem print function, you must select the protocol to be used as instructed in the message that appears when you add the printer driver in the "Printer - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 434
the occurrence of excessive misprints. HDD • For the procedure for printing files stored on the machine's hard drive, see "FILE PRINTING (page 6-25)" in "Document Filing". • When printing from a PC, you can set a password (5 to 8 digits) to maintain the confidentiality of information in a stored - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 435
custom folder where you want to save the file. • When [Quick File] is selected, "Document Filing" will be set to [Hold After Print]. • When [Quick File] is selected, the password entered in "Document Filing" is cleared. • If necessary, you can select the data format from CMYK and RGB for data to be - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 436
in "User Name" of "Default Job ID" in the printer driver. ► Using this function in a Windows environment: PRINTING IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT (page 3-4) ► Using this function in a Mac OS environment: PRINTING IN A Mac OS ENVIRONMENT (page 3-13) Files with a password and files that are protected by - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 437
simultaneously sends the data to the addresses stored in the machine. This function allows you to complete two tasks, printing and sending, with one operation from the printer driver. • Addresses must be stored in advance in the machine. For more information, see "ADDRESS BOOK (page 1-145)". • You - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 438
. This function eliminates the need for downloading the files from the FTP server to your PC and sending print jobs from the PC to the machine select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing. ► PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE (page 3-89 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 439
is selected, entry of a user name and password may be necessary. Enter your user name and password, and tap the [Enter] key. 4 Tap the key of the file that you wish to print, and tap the [Choose Print Settings] key on the action panel. • When printing multiple files, tap the keys of the files - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 440
from Easy Copy Print from external memory device (USB) Scan to External Memory Device Perform Detail Setting Sharp OSA external memory device (USB)]. If the screen does not appear, follow the steps below. (1) Tap the [HDD File retrieve] key. Toner Quantity Bk Operation Guide Enlarge Display - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 441
"Settings (administrator)" → [Printer Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Disabling of Network Folder Direct Print] is selected. When you select a PDF file that has a password, you must enter the password in the job status screen to begin printing. ► PRINTING AN ENCRYPTED PDF FILE (page 3-89) 3-82 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 442
[Select File from Network Folder to Print] key on the action panel. 3 Tap the [Open Registered Network Folder.] key on the action panel and tap the network folder that you wish to access. If a screen appears prompting you to enter a user name and password, check with your server administrator and - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 443
WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER Entering the network folder path directly 1 Direct Input of Path Path Input to Folder User Name Password Direct Input of Tap [Direct Input of Folder Path] in OK Folder Path Open Registered Network Folder. step 3 of "Printing a file in the network Refer to - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 444
. Select staple settings. Select to insert separator pages. Specify whether separator pages are to be added in front of or behind each set. Select the paper tray with the paper you want to use from the paper trays. Print with the file expanded to the full paper size. Select whether blank sheets are - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 445
If you configure your e-mail account in the machine, the machine periodically checks your mail server and automatically prints received e-mail attachments without using the printer driver. To perform e-mail print: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Printer Settings] → [E-mail - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 446
PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER Performing e-mail print Using your PC's e-mail software, specify the e-mail address of the machine in "Address" and send e-mail attached with a file to be printed following: Copies Function Staple*1 Punch*2 Punch holes Collate 2-sided Print Account Number*3 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 447
THE PRINTER DRIVER • The mail text must be in a text format. If entered in Rich Text format (HTML), the commands will have no effect. • If you enter "Config" in the mail text, a list of control commands is returned. • If nothing is entered in the body text (message) of the e-mail, printing will - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 448
, etc. connected to the machine, reset the password and begin printing. • To print an encrypted PDF file using the printer driver, enter the password when opening the file on your PC. • Printing is not possible if you do not know the password for the encrypted PDF file. • Encrypted PDF versions - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 449
because the machine ran out of paper, or if the size of paper specified in the printer driver is not loaded in the machine, a message will appear in the touch panel. Printing will begin automatically when paper is loaded in the machine. If paper of the desired size is not immediately available - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 450
For information on the setting items, refer to printer driver Help. PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS SCREEN / REFERRING TO HELP (page 3-6) Function PCL6 Yes Staple *3 Saddle Stitch *4 Punch *3 Fold *4 3-24 3-24 3-62 Yes Yes Half Fold Yes Yes Half Fold Finishing Offset Reverse Order Print - Yes - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 451
Transparency Inserts Carbon Copy Tab Paper Watermark Image Stamp Overlay Hidden Pattern Copies Stamp Print Mode Graphics Mode Bitmap Compression Sharpness Screening Smoothing Text To Black Vector To Black Toner Save *6 Page 3-18 3-61 3-26 3-21 3-68 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-32 3-30 3-58 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 452
Compression - No Yes No No Tandem Print 3-73 Yes Yes No Yes*7 Disable Blank Page Print 3-23 Yes Yes No No Custom Image Enhancement - No Yes No No • Job Name Shortening - Yes Yes No No • Use driver to render JPEGs 3-71 Yes Yes No No • Expand - No No No No • - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 453
PRINTER►APPENDIX SPECIFYING A BILLING CODE USING THE PRINTER DRIVER You can enter a billing code using the printer click the [Start] button, select [Devices and Printers]. 2 Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine and select [Printer Properties]. 3 Specify a billing code (1) (1) - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 454
[Billing Code Setting] - [Administration Settings], the entered billing code is disabled and is not recorded in the job log. • If you have started printing without specifying a billing code, a use code is recorded in the job log. Mac OS (1) (2) (1) Select [Billing Code]. (2) Enter the main code and - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 455
PRINTER►APPENDIX AUTHENTICATION BY SINGLE SIGN-ON When the user authentication is used, you must enter your user name and password to print from a printer driver. The Single Sign-on function can be used when Active Directory authentication is used on both the machine and the computer. When you use - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 456
dialog box and the User Authentication dialog box. • When Single Sign-on is enabled, [Print and Send] cannot be used. • If you logged in to the machine in advance before will be the name set by printer driver. If the user name is not set by printer driver, the user name in the job log will be the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 457
PRINTER►APPENDIX PRINTING BY GOOGLE CLOUD PRINT Google Cloud Print is a printing service that lets you print a file in a PC, mobile device, ] - [Default Settings] - [Disable Printing by Invalid User]. • If user authentication is enabled in the Sharp OSA application, allow printing by invalid users - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 458
from the Internet, the machine administrator password, and mDNS as needed. • In some cases the print quality using Google Cloud Print may not be the same as the print quality using other print methods (printer driver, etc.). The content of some files may not print correctly or may not be printable - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 459
4-50 FAX RECEPTION RECEIVING A FAX 4-51 • RECEIVING A FAX AUTOMATICALLY 4-51 • RECEIVING A FAX MANUALLY 4-53 PRINTING RECEIVED DATA • PRINTING A PIN CODE-PROTECTED FAX (Hold setting for received data print • PRINTING RECEIVED DATA AT A SPECIFIED TIME • CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 460
INBOUND ROUTING 4-66 • FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLY . . . 4-67 SAVING RECEIVED DATA 87 • CHECKING THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION (ORIGINAL COUNT 4-89 • STAMPING TIME FOR COMMUNICATION 4-98 • CHANGING THE PRINT SETTINGS FOR THE TRANSACTION REPORT (TRANSACTION REPORT - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 461
4-122 • MAKING AND RECEIVING PHONE CALLS . . . 4-122 CHECK THE COMMUNICATION STATUS FAX JOBS 4-123 COMPLETED FAX TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS 4-123 CHECKING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITIES 4-124 • PRINTING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORTS 4-124 • INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN 4-124 4-3 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 462
. ► TURNING ON THE POWER (page 1-11) When "Settings (administrator)" - [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Auto Wake Up Print] is enabled, the power automatically turns on when a fax is received (even if the [Power] button is off), and the fax is - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 463
key. • If necessary, you can set the type of telephone line manually. • When you connect to a digital line When Digital Line Network of the number, tap the [Space] key. • I-Fax Own Address Enter a default sender address (maximum of 56 characters). • Registration of Own Name Select Stores the sender - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 464
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX FAX MODE Fax mode has two modes: easy mode and normal mode. Easy mode is limited to frequently used functions that allow you to smoothly perform most fax jobs. If you need to select detailed settings or special functions, use normal mode. All functions - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 465
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX NORMAL MODE Normal mode lets you select any function setting that can be used for fax. Tap to display the numeric keys. Enter Fax No. Used to display the address book and enter a destination. Used to change fax settings. Displays the list of function - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 466
FACSIMILE►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A FAX FAX TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE This section explains the basic steps for sending a fax. [ 1 Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1- - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 467
(Slow Scan Mode) ►page 4-87 • Sending Originals of Different Sizes (Mixed Size Original) ►page 4-78 • Checking the Number of Scanned Original Sheets Before Transmission (Original Count) ►page 4-89 • Others ►page 4-70 4 Send the original. Tap the [Start] key. • To check a preview of a scanned - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 468
• Change the initial screen to the address book In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Default Display Settings]. If image send mode is enabled, the Address Book is displayed in place of the initial screen of this - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 469
/Disable Settings] → [Settings to Disable Transmission] → [Disable Direct Entry]. Prohibit manual entry of fax numbers and addresses. Configure the setting for each of the following items [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Pause Time Setting]. 4-11 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 470
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK A destination fax number is retrieved by simply tapping the one-touch key of that destination on the address book screen. (One-touch dialing) It is also possible to store multiple fax numbers in a one-touch key, allowing - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 471
address in other than the current mode In "Settings (administrator)", remove the checkmark from [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Address Book Default Selection] → [Apply Addresses of Sending Modes Only]. 4-13 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 472
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS When multiple destinations have been selected, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a destination (cancel selection of the destination) if necessary. 1 Original 8½x11 Address AAA AAA 1+ Detail Tap the [All - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 473
number is programmed when the destination is stored in the address book. • If you do not know the search number, tap [Print Individual List] on the action panel to print and check the address list. • When entering search numbers such as "0001" and "0011", "0" can be omitted. For example to enter - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 474
Start Tap [Target] and tap the LDAP server to be used. • If an authentication screen for the LDAP server appears, enter your user name and password. • If only one LDAP server has been stored, it is not necessary to take step 2. In this case, start from step 3. After the settings are - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 475
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 4 Item Name Enter Initials Target Search Start Enter Initial and press Enter key of external keyboard or [Start Search] button. Preview CA Speaker Start Enter a keyword and tap the [Search Start] key. When you tap the keyword entry box, the soft keyboard - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 476
in a transmission history to the address book. This is a convenient way to store the fax numbers and addresses of destinations that were manually entered. However, addresses of the Network Folder transmission cannot be stored from the machine. • If numeric keys were tapped during the previous - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 477
FACSIMILE►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 2 Sending History Select Address to Send Again. AAA AAA 1472580369 BBB BBB 3692580147 CCC CCC 2580147369 Direct Entry 1234567890 Direct Entry 0987654321 Delete All Histories Tap the key of the fax destination that you wish to redial. The last 50 addresses used for - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 478
the [Pause] key between the identification number of an international telephone service company (e.g., "001") and the country code (e.g., "81" for ", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Pause Time Setting] defines the length of pause. Set a value - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 479
originals: Use the automatic document feeder. The originals will be scanned into memory and then transmitted (memory transmission). When multiple original sheets are placed in line idle state, they will be sent in sequence from the scanned page in parallel with the scanning process (Quick On Line - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 480
Sending]. If you disable this setting, transmission will not begin until all pages have been scanned. Note that this setting does not apply to manual transmission. To fax thick originals or pages of a book: Place the original on the document glass. ► USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR TRANSMISSION (page - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 481
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS ORIGINAL ORIENTATION When an 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) original is placed in vertical orientation ( ), the image is automatically rotated 90 degrees and transmitted in horizontal orientation ( ) (Rotation Sending). If the original is placed in horizontal orientation ( ), - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 482
(of inch or non-standard size) is placed, the closest size may be displayed or the original size may not appear. In this event, manually set the correct original size. ► SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE (page 4-42) ► SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES (page - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 483
→ [Send Settings] → [Recall in Case of Line Busy]. When this setting is enabled, note that the machine will not attempt the call again when manual transmission or direct transmission is used. • Number of Times to Recall in Case of Error Specify how many times the machine will attempt the call - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 484
display the destination confirmation message prior to fax transmission: In "Settings", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Fax Dest. Confirmation Mode]. • When sending to a non-fax address, an address confirmation message will appear: Select the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 485
• Always stamp scanned originals In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] →[Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Default Verification Stamp]. When this is enabled, originals are always stamped without the need to select "Verification Stamp". 1 Place the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 486
control number. This number is recorded in the transaction report and image sending activity report and can be used to check fax jobs. ► PRINTING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORTS (page 4-124) To cancel scanning the original: Tap the [Cancel Scan] key. USING THE AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER FOR FAXING - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 487
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 2 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-131) 3 Address Book Address Fax Number Exposure Auto Resolution Super Fine Original Job Build Slow Scan Mode Global Address Search - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 488
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS FOR TRANSMISSION Storing scanned originals in machine's memory before transmitting them is called "Memory TX". This section explains how to scan the original placed on the document glass and send the data by the memory transmission - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 489
a job control number. This number can be used to locate the job in the Transaction Report or in the Image Sending Activity Report. ► PRINTING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORTS (page 4-124) • If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen is displayed, scanning automatically ends - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 490
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS TO SEND A FAX IN DIRECT TX MODE Sending a scanned original without saving it in the machine's memory is called "Direct TX". This section explains how to scan the original placed on the document glass and directly send data. When sending a - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 491
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 4 Specify the destination fax number. • Entering a destination number using the numeric keys ►page 4-11 • Retrieving a destination from an address book ►page 4-12 • Using a search number to retrieve a destination ►page 4-15 • Using a transmission log to - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 492
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS TRANSMISSION USING THE SPEAKER When the speaker is used to dial, the fax is sent after the number is dialed and the connection is established. • If a person answers, you will be able to hear his or her voice, but you will not be able to speak. • When the speaker - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 493
key can be simply tapped to retrieve multiple fax numbers. You can also send faxes with the one-touch key by setting the [Set as Default used] checkbox to when addresses are registered. If you wish to temporarily remove a destination from the stored addresses, open the detail confirmation screen and - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 494
Fax Broadcasting]. • Sending the same image sent in Fax mode In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Sending the same image sent in Fax mode]. Enable this when sending by broadcast transmission in Fax and other modes - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 495
transmission can be checked in the job status screen. If transmission to any of the destinations failed, resend the fax to those destinations. 1 Print Job Address Scan Fax Internet Fax Set Time Pages Status Check Details of Selected Job Stop/Delete Tap the job status display, and tapping - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 496
the original.) If the job was stored in a confidential folder or was stored as confidential file, a password entry screen will appear after you tap the [Retry] key. Enter the password. • Not using document filing: You will return to the base screen with the unsuccessful destinations entered. Place - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 497
same way that documents are printed. Select the PC-Fax driver as the printer driver for your computer and then select the Print command in the application. PC-Fax driver Help. • To use the PC-Fax function, the PC-Fax driver must be installed. For more information, see the Software Setup Guide. • This - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 498
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SET THE SCANNING OF THE ORIGINALS AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-Sided Original) The automatic document feeder will automatically scan both sides of the document. 2-Sided Original Send Two pages are sent as a single page (N-Up) • 2-sided - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 499
► Standard sizes (page 2-9) • When the original size is an inch size or a non-standard size, or if the size is not detected correctly, manually specify the original scan size. ► SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE (page 4-42) ► SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES (page - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 500
THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE When the original size is not standard (inch size or non-standard size) or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size. When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided scanning setting and send size cannot be changed. The image is sent in Mono2 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 501
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES When scanning a non-standard size original such as a postcard, specify the original size by numeric values after placing the original. The width can be from 1" to 17" (25 mm to 432 mm), and the height can be - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 502
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS STORING FREQUENTLY USED ORIGINAL SIZES Store the frequently used non-standard original sizes. This section explains how to store, retrieve, change, and delete non-standard original sizes. • The stored original size will be retained even if the main power is - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 503
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS 5 Address Book Address Fax Number Scan Size Store/Delete Select the size key to store/delete the custom original size. Dual Page Scan Divide into 2 Pages N-Up Put Multiple Pages in A Page Slow Scan Mode Scan Thin Paper Original Tap a key ( ) for storing a - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 504
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS Retrieving a stored original size 1 Tap the [Detail] key to change to normal mode. ► CHANGING MODES (page 1-19) 2 Tap the [Original] key. 3 Tap the [Scan Size] key and tap the [Custom Size] tab. 4 Address Book Address Fax Number Scan Size Slow Scan Mode - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 505
FACSIMILE►BASIC TRANSMISSION METHODS SPECIFYING THE SEND SIZE OF THE IMAGE Tap this key to specify the send size as a paper size. If the specified send size is larger than the scan size, the image will be enlarged. If the specified send size is smaller than the scan size, the image will be reduced. - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 506
Preview CA transmitted. After the settings are completed, tap . Others reception memory 100% Speaker Start To configure the default setting of image orientation: Select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Image Orientation] in "Settings - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 507
Send Settings] →[Common Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Default Exposure Settings]. Select [Auto] or [Manual]. When [Manual] is selected, set the contrast to one adjusts the exposure for light and dark parts of the original. Manual 1-2 Select this setting when the original consists of dark text - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 508
original consists of normal-sized text (like the text in this manual). Select this setting when your original has small text or diagrams with )", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] →[Fax Settings] → [Default Settings] → [ECM]. You can enable ECM (Error Correction Mode) to automatically - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 509
printed before the received data. • Received faxes will not be printed when the machine cannot print due to an error condition such as out of paper, out of toner, or a paper misfeed. The faxes will be printed Data Receive/Forward (Manual)] → [Fax Settings Settings] → [Default Settings]→ [Distinctive - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 510
setting for received data print) (page 4-56) How to check the fax reception mode You can check current fax reception mode in the system area at the top of the screen. Select ExternalSAypsptelimcaItniofonrmation Exit Event Information Maintenance Information Toner Remaining Check Fax Reception - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 511
(REMOTE RECEPTION) (page 4-122) To switch between auto reception and manual reception modes: Select [System Settings] in "Settings (administrator)" → [Image some faxes from being received. When using this function, you should print the received data as soon as possible without leaving it in the fax - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 512
divided onto multiple sheets of paper. Auto Size Select Each received image is printed at full size when possible. When not possible, the image is automatically reduced before printing. Set the Telephone Number for Data Forwarding When a problem prevents the machine from printing a received fax, the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 513
is installed, set the paper size to be Z-Folded when received faxes are printed. This setting can only be used when the [Multiple Set Print] and [Staple] checkboxes are selected . The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled is 50. (When the paper is oriented horizontally, the maximum number of - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 514
Important points when using this function If the received fax data is not printed or deleted, the fax memory will run low, and the machine will the fax mode base screen. When little space remains in the fax memory, "Manual receive is disabled. Due to out of memory." appears on the touch panel. - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 515
", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Time Specified Output of Received Data]. When "Change Password" or "Hold Setting for Received Data print" is , the password entry field is grayed out. • To disable the hold setting for received data - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 516
* The factory default setting is disabled. Important points when using this function If the received fax data is not printed or deleted, the MANUALLY (page 4-67) ► SAVING RECEIVED DATA (page 4-69) 1 Select ExternalSAypsptelimcaItniofonrmation Exit Event Information Maintenance Information Toner - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 517
tap [Forward to Other Address] on the action panel. ► FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLY (page 4-67) • To save the selected received image, tap [File] on image is an image for the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result. • Tap [Erase Specified Range] on the action panel to delete - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 518
machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received faxes fax will be held in memory until it can be printed. • All faxes received are forwarded. Note, however, Easy Copy Easy Scan Print Release Sharp OSA Toner Quantity Bk Operation Guide Enlarge Display Mode Settings - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 519
not stapling is performed. (Only when a finisher is installed) When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, PRINTING A PIN CODE-PROTECTED FAX (Hold setting for received data print) (page 4-56)" is enabled, you are prompted to enter a password. Enter the correct password - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 520
data can be forwarded to the specified destinations without being printed. The machine Forward Received Data Configure all forwarding settings for procedure for accessing the setting mode (Web version), see Quick Start Guide. The following explanation assumes that the setting mode (Web version) - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 521
routing is enabled. After the settings are completed, be sure to click the [Submit] button. • [Always Print]: Always prints received data before forwarding the data. • [Print at Error]: Prints received data only when an error prevents forwarding. • [Save Only at Error]: Saves received data only - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 522
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION When selecting senders from the "Sender Address Setting" list, you can use the [Shift] key or the [Ctrl] key on your keyboard to select multiple senders. 9 Select the forwarding conditions. • To always forward received data, select [Always Forward]. • To specify a day and - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 523
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION 14 Click [Inbound Routing Settings] in the [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] in "Settings (Web version)". 15 From the forwarding table, select [Forward to All Forward Destinations] or [Forward based on Forward Condition]. 16 From the forwarding table, - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 524
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION SAVING RECEIVED FAXES TO THE MACHINE'S HARD DISK (INBOUND ROUTING) Received faxes can be saved to the machine's hard disk. Saved faxes can be viewed on a computer. Set PDF, TIFF (multi) or TIFF (signal) for the saved Internet faxes. You can also receive notification of the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 525
be saved because of the file number limit or other reason are either printed or saved in the inbound routing error box. FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLY Received faxes can be forwarded manually after receipt. This function is available when [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 526
FACSIMILE►FAX RECEPTION 2 Received Data List All Received Data Cancel All Print Check Image Forward to Other Address Delete File Store Data in Folder Tap the key of the received data you wish to forward, and tap [ - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 527
* in "Settings (administrator)". * The factory default setting is disabled. Received data in the memory Exit Event Information Maintenance Information Toner Remaining In the System 2 Received Data List All Received Data Cancel All Print Check Image Forward to Other Address Delete File Store - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 528
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION OTHERS FUNCTION This section explains how to enter a destination from the initial screen of normal mode. ► CHANGING MODES (page 1-19) STORING FAX OPERATIONS (PROGRAM) This function collectively stores various settings as one program. The stored program can be retrieved - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 529
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION • The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can be used repeatedly for transmission. • The following contents cannot be stored in programs: • Tapping the [Speaker] key, Quick File, File, page move - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 530
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION SENDING ORIGINALS COLLECTIVELY SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE (N-UP) Reduce two original pages to the equal size and sent them as a single page. This function is convenient when you have a large number of original pages and wish to reduce the number of pages sent. For - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 531
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 3 Others Erase Dual Page Scan Book Divide Global Address Search Sending History Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [N-Up] key. Card Shot Own Name Select File Polling Timer Transaction Report Quick File Fax Own Number Sending Memory Box N-Up Call Search Number - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 532
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION SENDING BOTH SIDES OF A CARD AS A SINGLE PAGE (CARD SHOT) Send the front and reverse sides of a card as a single page, without the need to send each side separately. When using this function, the original must be placed on the document glass. Transmitted image Originals - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 533
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 4 Others Card Shot Exposure Specify Send Exposure Tap the [On] key, and specify the original size as required. Off On Back Y 2 1/8 (1 ~ 8 1/2) inch X 3 3/8 (1 ~ 8 1/2) inch Reset Fit to Send Size Size reception memory: 100% Preview CA Speaker Start After the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 534
all remaining sets. Originals Originals are scanned in separate sets. 1 1 1 101 This function is not available for Quick On Line Sending, manual transmission, Direct TX, or transmission using the speaker. • If you are going to change all original settings, select the settings before scanning - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 535
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 3 Address Book Address Fax Number Exposure Auto Resolution Super Fine Original Job Build Slow Scan Mode Mixed Size Orig. Original Count Others Scan Size Send Size 100% Auto Auto 8½x11 8½x11 reception memory 100% Sending History Call Search Number Direct - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 536
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION SENDING ORIGINALS OF DIFFERENT SIZES (MIXED SIZE ORIGINAL) This feature lets you scan and transmit originals of different sizes at the same time; for example, 8-1/2" x 14" (B4) size originals mixed together with 11" x 17" (A3) size originals. When scanning the originals, - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 537
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 3 Address Book Address Fax Number Exposure Auto Resolution Super Fine Original Job Build Slow Scan Mode Mixed Size Orig. Original Count Others Scan Size Send Size 100% Auto Auto 8½x11 8½x11 reception memory 100% Sending History Call Search Number Direct - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 538
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION SENDING AN ORIGINAL AS SEPARATE PAGES SENDING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE PAGES (DUAL PAGE SCAN) The left and right sides of an original can be transmitted as two separate pages. This function is useful when you wish to fax the left and right pages of a book or other bound - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 539
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 2 Enter the destination fax number. • Entering a destination number using the numeric keys ►page 4-11 • Retrieving a destination from an address book ►page 4-12 • Using a search number to retrieve a destination ►page 4-15 • Retrieving a destination from a global - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 540
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION SPLITTING A PAMPHLET BY PAGE AND TRANSMITTING THE PAGES SUCCESSIVELY (BOOK DIVIDE) The opened pages of a saddle-stitch pamphlet are split by page according to actual page order. When using this function, you do not need to sort the original pages to be sent. This function - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 541
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 4 Others Book Divide Select Original Binding Edge. Back Left Binding Right Binding Tablet Erase Erase Shadow Around Resolution Change Original Resolution Preview CA Select the binding edge of the pamphlet original. Check the preview image displayed in the screen, and - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 542
10 mm) and reduce the image to 70% before transmission, the erase width will be reduced to 3/8" (7 mm). To change the default erase width setting: Select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Erase Width Adjustment]. Specify a value from 0" (0 mm) to - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 543
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 2 Enter the destination fax number. • Entering a destination number using the numeric keys ►page 4-11 • Retrieving a destination from an address book ►page 4-12 • Using a search number to retrieve a destination ►page 4-15 • Retrieving a destination from a global - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 544
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 6 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 545
. 1 Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-131) Adjust the original guides slowly. If the originals are inserted with too much force, they may crumple and misfeed. 2 Enter the destination fax number. • Entering - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 546
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 3 Address Book Address Fax Number Exposure Auto Resolution Super Fine Original Job Build Slow Scan Mode Mixed Size Orig. Original Count Others Scan Size Send Size 100% Auto Auto 8½x11 8½x11 reception memory 100% Sending History Call Search Number Direct - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 547
number of scanned original pages. For example, when a 2-sided original is transmitted, the number "1" will appear to indicate that one original sheet is transmitted, not "2" to indicate the front-side page and the reverse side page. 1 Place originals in the automatic document feeder. ► AUTOMATIC - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 548
the number of scanned original pages. For example, when 2-sided copying is performed using one original, the number "1" will appear to indicate that one original sheet was scanned, not "2" to indicate the front-side page and the reverse side page. 6 Tap the [OK] key to start transmission. If this - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 549
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION STAMPING SCANNED ORIGINALS (VERIFICATION STAMP) This function stamps each original that is scanned using the automatic document feeder, allowing you to verify that all originals were correctly scanned. Position of verification stamp 1 Originals 1 Originals are scanned An - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 550
reception by polling from multiple machines is called "Serial Polling". Use the manual polling reception when you must start polling after listening to a recorded greeting, such as when using a fax information service. (1) Requests fax transmission Memory Box (3) The fax is received. Send (2) The - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 551
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 1 Enter the destination fax number. • Entering a destination number using the numeric keys ►page 4-11 • Retrieving a destination from an address book ►page 4-12 • Using a search number to retrieve a destination ►page 4-15 • Retrieving a destination from a global - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 552
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION INITIATING POLLING RECEPTION MANUALLY Use the manual polling reception when you must start polling after listening to a recorded greeting, such as when using a fax information service. • Make sure there is no original in the machine when using the polling reception function - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 553
fax page you transmit. Outside scanned image (factory default setting) Load Sender information Originals Sender information Originals The part of the original image will not appear). Example of the sender information printed 2017/02/02/Fri. 15:00 (1) AAAAA FAX No.: 0123456789 P.001/ - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 554
in the format "page number/total pages". Only the page number is printed when "Manual Transmission" or "Quick On Line Sending" is used. • To select [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Send Settings] → [Default Own Number Sending]. You can include the date and your sender information (sender - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 555
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 2 Enter the destination fax number. • Entering a destination number using the numeric keys ►page 4-11 • Retrieving a destination from an address book ►page 4-12 • Using a search number to retrieve a destination ►page 4-15 • Retrieving a destination from a global - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 556
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION ASSUMING A SPECIFIC USAGE SPECIFYING THE TIME FOR COMMUNICATION Specify a time at which a transmission or broadcast transmission will automatically take place. Transmission begins automatically at the specified time. This function is helpful when you wish to perform - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 557
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION 2 Enter the destination fax number. • Entering a destination number using the numeric keys ►page 4-11 • Retrieving a destination from an address book ►page 4-12 • Using a search number to retrieve a destination ►page 4-15 • Retrieving a destination from a global - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 558
conditions of transaction report: In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Transaction Report Print Select Setting]. 1 Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 559
• Even if the [Print Original Image] checkbox is , the original cannot be printed when speaker dialing, manual transmission, direct transmission, transaction report When [Print Original Image] is enabled, the first page of the transmitted original is printed on the same sheet as the transaction - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 560
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION POLLING MEMORY FUNCTIONS SENDING A FAX WHEN ANOTHER MACHINE POLLS YOUR MACHINE (POLLING MEMORY) Sending a document that has been scanned into memory when another machine polls your machine is called "Polling Memory". Prior to polling, the document that will be faxed to the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 561
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION SCANNING A DOCUMENT INTO POLLING MEMORY Follow these steps to scan a document into the memory box for polling transmission (Public Box). If another document remains in the memory box (Public Box), the newly scanned document is added to the previous document. In this case, - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 562
not stored in the Public Box, the [Public Box] key is grayed out. 4 Tap [Check Image] on the action panel to check the document. To print the document, tap [Print] on the action panel. 4-104 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 563
FACSIMILE►OTHERS FUNCTION DELETING A DOCUMENT FROM THE PUBLIC BOX Delete a document from the memory box (public box) when it is no longer required. 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. 2 Tap the [Polling Memory] tab. 3 Tap the [Public Box] key from the folder list. 4 Tap [Empty out - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 564
of information to multiple destinations (relay broadcast transmission) with other machines that support F-code communication. An F-code* is specified in each communication, enabling a Telecommunication Union (ITU), which coordinates global telecommunications networks and services. 4-106 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 565
and passcode of the box. Memory Box • Memory Box Name • Sub Address • Passcode • Recipient (only for F-code relay broadcast transmission) • Print PIN (only for F-code confidential reception) To create F-code memory boxes: Create in "Settings" - [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 566
address and passcode) is not available when dialing using a speaker or manual transmission. To store and edit one-touch keys and group keys: to see, or when the receiving machine is shared by multiple departments. To print an F-code confidential fax, the PIN Code must be entered. ► CHECKING FAXES - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 567
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION USING F-CODES Send a fax to a destination fax number after adding the F-code (sub-address and passcode). If necessary, the F-code confidential transmission can be used in combination with a broadcast transmission or timer - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 568
Print Select Setting] → [Confidential Reception]. If you forget the PIN Code: There is no way to use the machine to check a PIN Code that has been specified. Exercise care not to forget the PIN Code. Should you forget or need to verify the PIN Code, contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 569
Checked Forward to Other Address Delete on the action panel. File Store Data in Folder Displays the received data image. To print the document, tap [Print] on the action panel. Cancel All POLLING RECEPTION USING F-CODES This function enables your machine to call another machine and initiate - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 570
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Polling] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key. To cancel the Polling setting: Tap the [Polling] key to clear the checkmark. 2 Specify the destination. (1)Enter - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 571
If other documents have already been stored in the memory box, the document is added to the previously stored documents. • By factory default, the document sent to the other machine will be deleted automatically. To create F-code memory boxes: Create in "Settings (administrator)" - [System Settings - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 572
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION 3 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory Box] key. 4 Confidential Folder Name Public Box Polling Memory Times Once Change Number of Times Tap the [Polling Memory] tab. Back 8½x11 reception memory 8½x11 100% CA Start 5 Tap the folder of the F- - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 573
POLLING BOX You can check the document stored in the F-code memory polling box. A document in a memory box cannot be printed while the document is being transmitted. By factory default, the document sent to the other machine will be deleted automatically. 1 Tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Memory - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 574
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION DELETING A DOCUMENT STORED FOR F-CODE POLLING TRANSMISSION Delete the document stored in an F-code memory polling box in order to be able to store a new document. No original can be deleted from the memory box during communication. 1 Tap the [Others] key, - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 575
to support Print" is disabled.) • To create F-code memory boxes: Create in "Settings (administrator)" - [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [F-Code Memory Box]. • Prohibit Broadcast: Create in "Settings (administrator)" - [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Default - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 576
FACSIMILE►PERFORMING F-CODE COMMUNICATION 1 Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, or on the document glass. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-131) ► DOCUMENT GLASS (page 1-133) 2 Specify the destination. • Entering a destination - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 577
CODE COMMUNICATION (page 4-107) • It is not necessary for the destination machines to support F-code communication. • The machine that requests a relay broadcast transmission only bears the using this function are printed at the forwarding destination, the date and time of reception cannot be - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 578
passcode can be used for more than one memory box. • [ ] and [#] cannot be used in a sub-address. • A passcode can be omitted. • Do not forget the Print PIN. In the event that you forget the Print PIN or need to verify the Print PIN, contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department. 4-120 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 579
operate normally. • If the plug on the telephone line cord does not fit into the jack on your extension phone, contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department. 4-121 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 580
Send Settings] → [Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual)] → [Fax Settings] → [Receive Settings] to [Manual Reception]. • To change the number to receive faxes: In "Settings", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Remote Reception Number Setting]. Set - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 581
queue list. When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed job list and the status field displays "In Memory". After the fax is printed, the status changes to "Received". Timer transmission jobs A timer transmission job appears at the end of the job queue list until the specified time - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 582
it cannot be reprinted. To configure the image sending activity report: In "Settings", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Activity Report Print Select Setting]. INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE RESULT COLUMN Error types and other information are - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 583
printed in the result column Print not be received. Direct transmission or manual transmission was not successful because a , however, the other machine does not support F-code communication. F-code communication was refused use by service technicians. A fax was sent from a party - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 584
MODE 5-9 SELECTING NETWORK SCANNER MODE 5-9 IMAGE SEND SEQUENCE 5-10 Default settings for Scan Save 5-12 • TRANSMITTABLE ORIGINAL SIZES 5-14 • A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION 5-19 • ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY 5-20 • SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER 5-21 • RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 585
THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION (SHARPNESS 5-96 • REMOVING CHROMATIC THE NUMBER OF SCANNED ORIGINAL SHEETS BEFORE TRANSMISSION (ORIGINAL COUNT 5- MANUALLY . . . 5-132 PRINTING RECEIVED DATA 5-133 • PRINTING A PIN CODE-PROTECTED FAX (Hold setting for received data print 5-133 • PRINTING - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 586
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX CHECKING THE STATUS OF TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS IMAGE SEND JOBS 5-145 COMPLETED TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION JOBS 5-146 SCANNING FROM A COMPUTER (PC Scan Mode) BASIC SCANNING PROCEDURE 5-147 METADATA DELIVERY PREPARATIONS FOR METADATA DELIVERY. . . 5-152 • METADATA DELIVERY ( - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 587
only a URL link (without attaching the file) that allows the recipient to download the file. • Scan to FTP The scanned file is sent to a specified an Internet fax. Internet faxes are received if necessary. The machine supports Direct SMTP, which lets you directly send Internet faxes within your - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 588
)" → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Operation Settings] to disable the [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] setting. 3 Store the sender information. Before using Scan to E-mail: Store a default sender name in "Sender Name" and a reply e-mail address in "Reply E-mail Address". 5-5 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 589
the [Space] key. • I-Fax Own Address: Enter a default sender address (maximum of 56 characters). • Registration of Own Name → [Network Settings] → [Services Settings]. (Administrator rights are A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 590
Scanner Tool, see the "Shapdesk Installation Guide". When a standard installation is performed SENDING TO A DIRECT SMTP ADDRESS The machine supports Direct SMTP, which lets you directly send [Recall in Case of Line Busy]. The factory default setting is two attempts at 3-minute intervals. When a - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 591
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER NETWORK SCANNER MODE Network scanner mode has two modes: easy mode and normal mode. Easy mode is limited to frequently used functions that allow you to smoothly perform most image send jobs. If you need to select detailed settings - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 592
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►BEFORE USING THE MACHINE AS A NETWORK SCANNER NORMAL MODE Normal mode lets you select any function setting that can be used for network scanner. This section explains the keys on a base screen, taking as an example the E-mail base screen. Several methods are available in the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 593
Keyboard Select File Format Space AltGr Color Start Caps Shift Keyboard Select File Format Space AltGr # CA ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-15) ► USING A TRANSMISSION LOG TO RESEND (page 5-25) ► RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 594
6-7) • Always stamp scanned originals In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Default Verification Stamp]. When this is enabled, originals are always stamped without the need to select "Verification Stamp". 5-11 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 595
settings for Scan Save In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Default Settings]. Default Color Mode Settings Select a default color mode setting for both color and black & white in e-mail address, network folder, FTP and Desktop. Specify - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 596
key is tapped. Setup Items Setting Color Auto Full Color Black & White Grayscale Mono2 Resolution Setting The following settings are available for the default resolutions of common scan, E-mail, Internet fax, and fax mode. Scanner Common 100 X 100 dpi, 150 X 150 dpi, 200 X 200 dpi, 300 X 300 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 597
of inch or non-standard size) is placed, the closest standard size may be displayed or the original size may not appear. In this event, manually set the correct original size. ► SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE (page 5-50) ► SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES (page - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 598
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS ENTERING DESTINATIONS ENTERING DESTINATIONS RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM AN ADDRESS BOOK In the address book screen, simply tap the one-touch key of a registered destination to retrieve the destination. If necessary, store multiple destinations in a one- - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 599
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 1 Tap the [Address Book] key. In Easy mode Original 8½x11 Address E-mail Address Global Address Book Sending History Address Search Detail Scan to HDD/ USB CA Preview Auto Set B/W Start Color Start In Normal mode Address Book Address Touch to - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 600
the user list. My Address can be used when login by login name / password is enabled in user authentication. Use this address when you want to send a • When [Apply E-mail address of the user for login.] is enabled in [Default Address] • When the e-mail address of the logged in user has not been - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 601
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS When multiple destinations have been selected, you can display and check the destinations. You can also delete a destination from the list (cancel selection of the destination). 1 Tap the [Address Review] key. - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 602
number is programmed when the destination is stored in the address book. • If you do not know the search number, tap [Print Individual List] on the action panel to print and check the address list. • When entering search numbers such as "0001" and "0011", "0" can be omitted. For example to enter - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 603
] → [Settings to Disable Transmission] → [Disable Direct Entry]. Prohibit manual entry of fax numbers and addresses. Configure the setting for each of the [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Preset restriction of E-mail for direct input]. Enable this - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 604
• You can select [Bcc] if [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Default Settings] → [Bcc Setting] → [Enable Bcc] is enabled in [System Settings]. • the current user is automatically entered in the user name field. • Enter a password with up to 255 single-byte characters. 2 Tap the key of the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 605
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 4 Network Folder \\Server3 Network Folder Name Folder1 Folder2 Folder3 Folder4 Folder5 Folder6 Tap the key of the network folder. After the settings are completed, tap the [OK] key. You will return to the screen of step 1. Tap the [OK] key again to - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 606
Start Tap [Destination] and tap the LDAP server to be used. • If an authentication screen for the LDAP server appears, enter your user name and password. • If only one LDAP server has been stored, it is not necessary to take step 2. In this case, start from step 3. 5-23 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 607
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►ENTERING DESTINATIONS 3 Enter Initials Item Name Target Search Start CA Scan to HDD/ USB Tap of [Item], and select an item to be searched from [Name] or [Address]. Enter Initial and press Enter key of external keyboard or [Start Search] button. B/W Start Color Start - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 608
an address book. This is convenient when storing an address that was manually entered. • When a destination for retransmission is selected in the stored. • Group destinations • Broadcasting destinations • The user name and password are not stored for security reasons. If a screen requiring you to - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 609
key of the destination to resend. The last 50 addresses used for transmission are displayed. If a screen requiring you to enter the user name and password appears, enter the information. To cancel the resend setting: Tap the highlighted key. In normal mode, you can select an address and tap [New - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 610
prevents non-delivery of scanned files caused by the e-mail server. Upon receiving the e-mail, the recipient can use the URL in the e-mail to download the scanned file. When the scanned file is too large Scan to E-mail Scanned file Sending the file as an e-mail attachment The attachment is - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 611
the recipient Using simple mode When [Enable Send Destination Link as Default] is enabled in the settings (administrator), the scanned data is Scanned files cannot be browsed by a method other than downloading. • Scanned files cannot be manually deleted, and are retained for the save period set in - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 612
administrator)" - [System Settings] - [Image Send Settings] - [Scan Settings] - [Condition Settings] [Send Destination Link Settings] - [Enable Send Destination Link as Default]. When this function is enabled and e-mail is sent in normal mode, the [Send Destination Link] checkbox in the action panel - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 613
in portrait (vertical) orientation ( ). If placed in landscape (horizontal) orientation ( ), an incorrect size will be detected. For an 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R (A5R) size original, enter the original size manually. 5-30 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 614
18) ► USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM , for example, collectively sending two original pages as one sheet or original pages with different sizes. 5-31 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 615
[PDF/Encry./Compact], or [PDF/Encry./Compact/U-Fine], you will be prompted to enter the password when you tap the [B/W Start] or [Color Start] key. Tap the password entry box to open the keyboard screen, enter a password using a maximum of 32 characters, and tap the [OK] and [Send] key in sequence - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 616
→ [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Default Reply.Address Set] in "Settings (administrator)" are used. If this is not configured, the reply address configured in [Network Settings] → [Services Settings] → [SMTP] → [Sender Address] in the "Settings" is - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 617
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 4 Address Book Address Touch to input Address Subject Global Address Search Sending History To change the file name, tap the [File Name] entry box. File Name Specified by System Settings Color Mode Auto/Grayscale Resolution 200x200dpi File Format PDF - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 618
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 8 To change the body text, tap the [Body Text] entry box. 9 Address Book Address Touch to input Address Body Entry Pre-set Message Edit Others Sending History Clear All CA Enter the body text. After the settings are completed, tap . • To select a pre- - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 619
default address has been configured using "Settings" →[System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Scan Settings] → [Default Address] → [Default . For an 5-1/2" x 8-1/2"R (A5R) size original, enter the original size manually. ► SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE (page 5-50) • Rotation - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 620
A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page ]→[Image Send Settings]→[Internet Fax Settings]→[Default Settings] in "Settings (administrator)". collectively sending two original pages as one sheet or original pages with different sizes. - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 621
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 8 Tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that the operation is completed. Open the automatic document feeder and remove the original. • If no action is taken for one minute after the confirmation screen is displayed, scanning - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 622
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 4 Others Subject Direct Entry Clear Tap a pre-set text key. No.1 AAA No.2 BBB No.3 CCC No.4 DDD No.5 EEE Back reception mem: ory: 100% Preview CA Receive Start To cancel the selection of the subject: Tap the [Clear] key. If you wish to directly - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 623
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 8 Others Body Entry Pre-set Message Enter the body text. After the settings are completed, tap . Clear All • To select a pre-set text previously stored in the Setting mode (Web version), tap the [Pre-set Message] key. • To directly enter the body - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 624
key can be simply tapped to retrieve multiple fax numbers. You can also send faxes with the one-touch key by setting the [Set as Default used] checkbox to when addresses are registered. If you wish to temporarily remove a destination from the stored addresses, open the detail confirmation screen and - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 625
VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-18) ► USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-23) ► USING A TRANSMISSION LOG - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 626
, tap [Send Same Image as Fax Address] on the action panel in normal mode. An address of a mode in which the number of original sheets are specified, if it exists, is enabled. If a broadcast transmission is performed that includes destinations for which an attachment size limit has been set using - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 627
all addresses using the same image width as Internet Fax. Background Adjustment Cannot be set. Blank Page Skip Drop Out color Contrast Sharpness RGB Sign Encrypt Multicrop Business Card Scan Image Crop Broadcast transmission is not possible to both direct SMTP addresses and other types - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 628
in the job status screen. If transmission to any of the destinations failed, resend the image to those destinations. 1 Tap the job status display. 2 Print Job Address Scan Fax Set Time Pages Internet Fax Status Enter Multi Selection Mode Back Tap the [Scan] tab or [Internet Fax] tab, and - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 629
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 4 Details Number: Address 001 aaa@aaa.□□□ 002 bbb@bbb.□□□ Start Time 10:05 07/07 10:05 07/07 Status Resend to All Addresses Which Failed in Sending Back After tapping the [Failed] tab, tap [Resend to All Addresses Which Failed in Sending] on the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 630
that documents are printed. Select the PC-Fax driver as the printer driver for your computer and then select the Print command in the driver must be installed and then updated using the CD-ROM that accompanies the Internet fax expansion kit. For more information, see the Software Setup Guide - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 631
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE IMAGE SETTINGS AUTOMATICALLY SCANNING BOTH SIDES OF AN ORIGINAL (2-SIDED ORIGINAL) The automatic document feeder is used to automatically scan both sides of an original. Scan transmission 2-Sided Original Front and reverse sides are scanned The settings - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 632
PLACED ORIGINAL (page 5-14) • When the original size is an inch size or a non-standard size, or if the size is not detected correctly, manually specify the original scan size. ► SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE IN PAPER SIZE (page 5-50) ► SPECIFYING THE ORIGINAL SCAN SIZE USING NUMERIC VALUES (page - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 633
the original size is a non-standard size or is not detected correctly, manually specify the original size. When [Long Size] is selected, the 2-sided Original Blank Page Skip Skip Blank Page in Original Color Mode Sharpness Adjust Outline of Image Preview CA Start After tapping the [Original - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 634
) inch Others Execute Background Adjustment Slow Scan Mode Scan Thin Paper Original Blank Page Skip Skip Blank Page in Original Color Mode Sharpness Adjust Outline of Image Preview CA Start Specify the original size. • Tap the areas displaying width and height sizes respectively, and enter - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 635
Store/Delete Direct Entry Custom Size Background Adjustment Slow Scan Mode Scan Thin Paper Original Blank Page Skip Skip Blank Page in Original Color Mode Sharpness Adjust Outline of Image Others Preview CA Start Tap [Store/Delete] key. 5-52 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 636
. X17 Y11 Cancel Delete Background Adjustment Slow Scan Mode Scan Thin Paper Original Blank Page Skip Skip Blank Page in Original Color Mode Sharpness Adjust Outline of Image Modify Preview CA Others Start key. 6 Address Book Address Touch to input Address Scan Size Size Input Enter Size - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 637
Blank Page in Original Color Mode After selecting the key of the original size, tap the key. AB Inch X17 Y11 Direct Entry Custom Size Sharpness Adjust Outline of Image Check that the specified size is displayed on the Scan Size screen. Preview CA Others Start To cancel the operation Tap - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 638
11 x 17 8½ x 132/5 Others Background Adjustment Slow Scan Mode Scan Thin Paper Original Blank Page Skip Skip Blank Page in Original Color Mode Sharpness Adjust Outline of Image Preview CA Start Tap the desired send size key. After the settings are completed, tap . Depending on the paper size - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 639
Size Skip Blank Page in Original Color Mode image. 100% Auto Auto Sharpness Adjust Outline of Image If this setting is not correct, a suitable After the settings are completed, tap . Others Start To configure the default setting of image orientation, select [System Settings] → [Image Send - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 640
set of originals is inserted.) • Set the default contrast Refer to page 4-49. • Set the default document settings In "Settings (administrator)", select [ mode, Data entry mode) Setup Items Auto Manual Text Text/Printed Photo Text/Photo Printed Photo Photo Map Description The original image type - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 641
the original type. 4 Address Book Address Touch to input Address E-mail/Exposure Specify density of image to send. 1 3 5 Auto Manual Text Printed Photo Text/ Prtd.Photo Photo Text/Photo Map Others Background Adjustment Resolution Change Sending Resolution File Format Select File Format - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 642
, 200 x 200 dpi produces an image that is sufficiently legible. For photos and illustrations, a high resolution setting (600 x 600 dpi, etc.) will produce a sharp image. However, a high resolution setting will result in a large file, and if the file is too large, transmission may not be possible. In - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 643
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE CHANGING FORMAT IN SCAN OR DATA ENTRY MODE Change the file format (file type and compression mode/compression ratio) for sending a scanned image at the time of transmission. In addition, if the scanned originals are divided into separate files, the number - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 644
specified for the file format, the password entry screen appears when scanning. Enter a password with up to 32 characters. and [Map] will change to [Text/Printed Photo]. • The condition of the original If the recipient's PDF viewer does not support Flate Compression, the recipient may not be able - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 645
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 3 Tap the key of the desired file type. After the settings are completed, tap . When the [B/W] key is selected When the [Color/Grayscale] key is selected File Format B/W TIFF PDF DOCX RTF PDF/A-1a XLSX TXT(UTF-8) XPS PDF/A-1b PPTX Prog. File Format - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 646
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 6 Tap the [File Format] key. 7 Tap the [Color/Grayscale] or [B/W] tab and select the format mode for scanning. • The format setting for [B/W] mode is the file format with the color mode set to [Mono2]. • The format setting for [Color/Grayscale] mode is - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 647
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 11 To change the number of pages per file, set the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox to , and use numeric keys to specify the number of pages per file. • When the [Specified Pages per File] checkbox is , one file is created for each of the number of - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 648
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE CHANGING FORMAT IN INTERNET FAX MODE The format for Internet Fax mode is set in the system settings. ► Internet Fax Settings (page 8-64) CHANGING COLOR MODE Change the color mode used to scan the original. In Easy mode Tap the [B/W Start] or [Color Start] - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 649
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE 4 Tap the [Grayscale] or [Mono2] key to set the B/W mode for automatic color selection. Specify whether Mono2 or grayscale is used when scanning black and white originals. Note that if the file format is set to JPEG, scanning will take place in grayscale - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 650
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►TRANSMITTING AN IMAGE SETTING SCAN SETTINGS AUTOMATICALLY (Auto Set) To automatically set scan settings appropriate for the original, tap the [Auto Set] key in the base screen of Easy Mode. Original 8½x11 Address E-mail Address Original Resolution 2-Sided Auto File - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 651
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS OTHER FUNCTIONS STORING SCAN OPERATIONS (PROGRAM) This function collectively stores various settings as one program. The stored program can be retrieved using an easy operation. For example, suppose 8-1/2" x 11" (A4) size documents are scanned into a file and - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 652
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS • The settings stored in a program will be retained even after the program is used for transmission. The same settings can be used repeatedly for transmission. • The following contents cannot be stored in programs: • Tapping of the [Speaker] key • Quick File • - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 653
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the document glass, scan each page one at a time. When scanning finishes, place the next - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 654
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING AND SENDING ORIGINALS COLLECTIVELY SENDING TWO PAGES AS A SINGLE PAGE (N-Up) Reduce two original pages to the equal size and sent them as a single page. This function is convenient when you have a large number of original pages and wish to reduce the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 655
VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-18) ► USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-23) ► USING A TRANSMISSION LOG - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 656
VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-18) ► USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-23) ► USING A TRANSMISSION LOG - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 657
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Tap the [Mixed Size Original] key. Otherwise, tap the [Others] key, and tap the [Mixed Size Original] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key. For mixed size originals, set "Original" to "Auto". To cancel - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 658
VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-18) ► USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-23) ► USING A TRANSMISSION LOG - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 659
Adjustment Color Mode Tap the [On] key, and specify the original size as required. Contrast Adjust Contrast of Image Off Y 2 1/8 (1~8 1/2) inch Sharpness After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in Adjust Outline of Image On Drop Out Color sequence. Remove Chromatic Color - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 660
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SIMULTANEOUSLY SCANNING MULTIPLE CARDS, RECEIPTS OR OTHER SMALL ORIGINALS TO INDIVIDUAL FILES (MULTICROP) This function automatically crops and scans multiple cards, receipts, or other small originals placed on the document glass to individual files. • This - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 661
VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-18) ► USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-23) ► USING A TRANSMISSION LOG - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 662
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING A BUSINESS CARD, READING THE TEXT STRING, CREATING A FILE, AND SENDING THE FILE (BUSINESS CARD SCAN) You can scan a business card, extract the name and telephone number from the text string read by OCR, and create and send a vCard or other file. Send - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 663
VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-18) ► USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-23) ► USING A TRANSMISSION LOG - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 664
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 6 Others Business Card Scan Off Language English Setting On File Format vCard (*.vcf) Original Count Tap the [On] key, and change settings as needed. When you have completed the settings, tap the then the [Back] key. key and Also Send Image Use Full - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 665
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS File names The user can assign any file name to a file. When [Use Full Name on Card as the File Name] is enabled, the name on a scanned business card can be assigned as the file name. If you do not set a file name, the machine will assign an automatically - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 666
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING MULTIPLE PHOTOS AT ONCE TO INDIVIDUAL FILES (Image Crop) This function automatically scans photographs placed on the document glass to individual files. This function can be used with Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP/Desktop, Scan to Network Folder, and Save - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 667
VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-18) ► USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-23) ► USING A TRANSMISSION LOG - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 668
VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-18) ► USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-23) ► USING A TRANSMISSION LOG - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 669
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 4 Tap the [Job Build] key. A checkmark appears on the icon. If you are performing Scan to E-mail, tap the [Others] key and then tap the [Job Build] key. To cancel the job build setting: Tap the [Job Build] key to uncheck it. 5 Change settings as needed. 6 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 670
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS SCANNING AND SENDING AN ORIGINAL AS SEPARATE PAGES SCANNING AN ORIGINAL AS TWO SEPARATE PAGES (DUAL PAGE SCAN) The left and right sides of an original are scanned as two separate pages. This function is useful when you wish to successively scan each page of a - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 671
A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING settings are completed, tap the [Back] key. Drop Out Color Sharpness Contrast Preview CA RGB Adjust File Back 8½x11 Quick File 8½x11 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 672
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. When scanning finishes, place the next original and tap the [Start] key. Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then tap the [Read-End] key. A beep will sound to indicate that transmission has - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 673
VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-18) ► USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-23) ► USING A TRANSMISSION LOG - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 674
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Others Book Divide Select Original Binding Edge. Off Left Binding Right Binding Tablet Back Blank Page Skip Skip Blank Page in Original Erase Erase Shadow Around Background Adjustment Resolution Change Sending Resolution Color Mode Preview CA Start - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 675
VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-18) ► USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-23) ► USING A TRANSMISSION LOG - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 676
the [Others] key, and tap the [Background Adjustment] key. 5 Others Background Adjustment Adjust Original Background Darkness. File Format Select File Format Sharpness Adjust Outline of Image Contrast Tap or slide the slider to adjust the range to be suppressed. Adjust Contrast of Image Off - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 677
VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-18) ► USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-23) ► USING A TRANSMISSION LOG - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 678
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Others Contrast Sharpness Adjust Outline of Image Resolution Change Sending Resolution Tap or slide the slider to adjust the contrast level. Exposure Specify density of image to send. - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 679
THE OUTLINE OF THE SCANNED ORIGINAL BEFORE TRANSMISSION (SHARPNESS) Blurry outlined original Enhance the outline before transmitting. USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING A - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 680
of image to send. Off Color Mode After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in 123 4 5 On sequence. Less Sharp More Sharp Back Preview CA Start To cancel the sharpness setting: Tap the [Off] key. 6 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 681
VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-18) ► USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-23) ► USING A TRANSMISSION LOG - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 682
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 683
VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-18) ► USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-23) ► USING A TRANSMISSION LOG - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 684
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 6 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 685
] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Erase Width Adjustment]. The width can be set from 0" to 1" (0 mm to 20 mm). The factory default setting is 1/2" (10 mm). The setting changed here will apply to [System Settings] → [Copy Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Erase Width Adjustment] in - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 686
VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-18) ► USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-23) ► USING A TRANSMISSION LOG - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 687
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 6 Specify the erase width. After the settings are completed, tap and [Back] keys in sequence. • Tap the numeric value display indicating the margin shift area on the front side or reverse side, and enter the area using the numeric keys. • To quickly set the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 688
document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder. Adjust the original guides slowly. ► AUTOMATIC DOCUMENT FEEDER (page 1-131) If the originals SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 689
Register Current Settings Send Destination Link A checkmark appears on the icon. After the settings are completed, tap the [Back] key. Drop Out Color Sharpness Contrast Preview CA RGB Adjust File Back 8½x11 Quick File 8½x11 Start To cancel the slow scan Mode setting Tap the [Slow Scan - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 690
The machine detects blank pages, enabling you to skip useless blank sheets without checking an original. Blank page Do not transmit blank pages. SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 691
of original have (P.8) Global Address Search When scanning ends, check the number of original sheets and the Subject been scanned. 10 sheets of original will be Perform the job? Sending History number of sheets to be sent and tap File Name Color Mode Auto/Grayscale Resolution 200x200dpi File - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 692
"1" will appear to indicate that one original sheet is transmitted, not "2" to indicate the front A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page the [Back] key. Drop Out Color Sharpness Contrast Preview CA RGB Adjust File Back - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 693
. Scanning will not be completed automatically and the image will not be reserved for transmission. If the displayed number of original sheets is different from the actual number of sheets: Tap the [Cancel] key and then tap the [OK] key in the message screen to clear all scanned data. Scan settings - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 694
VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-18) ► USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-23) ► USING A TRANSMISSION LOG - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 695
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. Tap the [Preview] key to check the preview of an image before sending a fax. For more information, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 696
the top of the file you transmit. This function cannot be used in scan mode or data entry mode. Example of the sender information printed (1) Date, time: The date and time of transmission. (2) Sender name: The sender name programmed in the machine. (3) Source Address. (4) Page numbers: Page number - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 697
mode. For a broadcast transmission, changes to the transaction report print conditions apply to all destinations. 1 Place the original. Place A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 698
, see "CHECKING THE IMAGE TO BE TRANSMITTED (page 5-67)". Original image in transaction report When [Print Original Image] is enabled, the first page of the transmitted original is printed on the same sheet as the transaction report. The original image is reduced to allow it to fit on the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 699
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS STARTING A TRANSMISSION AT A SPECIFIED TIME (TIMER TRANSMISSION) Specify a time at which a transmission or broadcast transmission will automatically take place. Transmission begins automatically at the specified time. This function is helpful when you wish to - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 700
VIEWING A LIST OF THE SELECTED DESTINATIONS (page 5-18) ► USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING A DESTINATION FROM A GLOBAL ADDRESS BOOK (page 5-23) ► USING A TRANSMISSION LOG - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 701
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 8 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning has ended, and the machine stands by for transmission. • When you - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 702
► USING A SEARCH NUMBER TO RETRIEVE A DESTINATION (page 5-19) ► ENTERING AN ADDRESS MANUALLY (page 5-20) ► SPECIFYING A NETWORK FOLDER (page 5-21) ► RETRIEVING A DESTINATION Drop Out Color Card Shot Image Crop Background Adjustment Sharpness Multicrop Timer Blank Page Skip Contrast Call Search - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 703
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 704
tap the [Encrypt E-mail] key. Book Divide Business Card Scan Verification Stamp Drop Out Color Card Shot Image Crop Background Adjustment Sharpness Multicrop Timer Blank Page Skip Contrast Call Search Number Verification Stamp Program Registration Register Current Settings Send Destination Link - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 705
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning of the original. • If you inserted the original pages in the document feeder tray, all pages are scanned. A beep will sound to indicate that scanning and transmission have ended. • When you place the original on the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 706
function. Settings required on the machine System settings Enable the "Gmail" setting in "Settings (Administrator)" → [System Settings] → [Network Settings] → [External Service Connect] → [E-mail Connect Settings]. Add the Gmail icon to the home screen 1 Tap [Edit Home] on the action panel. 2 In - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 707
] on the action panel. You will exit home edit mode and return to the home screen. To edit the home screen, refer to "U/I Customize Guide". Sending a scanned document by Gmail link function The steps for scanning a document on the machine and sending the scanned image by Gmail are explained below - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 708
e-mail. You can connect to "Microsoft Exchange Server 2010/2013" or "Exchange Online (Cloud Service)". Before using Exchange link function This section explains the settings that must be configured before you can to the home screen. To edit the home screen, refer to "U/I Customize Guide". 5-125 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 709
Exchange are explained below. 1 Tap the [Exchange (E-Mail)] key in the home screen. The Exchange login screen appears. 2 Enter the user name and password used to connect to the Exchange server or the Exchange Online. The settings screen appears. 3 Select the address of the recipient and scan - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 710
used for login to a different account. Tap the [Switch Accounts] key to open the Gmail or Exchange login screen, and enter the user name and password of the account that you want to use. 5-127 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 711
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►OTHER FUNCTIONS Scan settings To select advanced scan settings, tap the [Detail] key. Details screen The scan settings below can be selected. Details and restrictions on each setting can be found on the indicated pages. Refer to these pages as needed. Setting Description - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 712
may not be able to use the Gmail or Exchange connection functions, or sending may be slow or may stop before the job is completed. • Sharp Corporation does not in any way guarantee the continuity or stability of Gmail or Exchange connection functions. With the exception of instances provided for by - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 713
LOG PRINTING IMAGE SENDING ACTIVITY REPORTS Print a problems, such as the types of errors that occurred. The most recent 200 transactions are included in the report. You can have the machine print Sending Activity Report are erased when the report is printed, and thus it cannot be reprinted. To - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 714
TIFF-F file or there was no attached file, and thus printing was not possible. FAIL xx (xxxx) The transaction failed due error number: Code for use by service technicians. displayed* Displayed at the * If the receiving machine is a SHARP machine, the receiving machine will return "dispatched - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 715
and printed. In the default setting, instructions in the message to load an appropriate size of paper. • You can print the received Internet fax data at the specified time. ► PRINTING RECEIVED DATA AT A SPECIFIED TIME (page 5-134) • You can print the received Internet fax data when a password - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 716
can check the received data image on the touch panel before printing. ► CHECKING THE IMAGE BEFORE PRINTING (page 5-135) • The received faxes will be stored in memory regardless of whether they are received automatically or manually. • When the received data is transferred to another machine, data - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 717
numbers of pages at peak times during the day, and when you do not urgently need to print. • The printed data is automatically deleted from memory. • If the power is turned off at the specified time, printing will start at the timing when the power is turned on. • This function can be specified - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 718
printing. This function is available when [System Settings] → [Image Send Settings] → [Common Settings] → [Condition Settings] → [Preview Setting] → [Received Data Image Check Setting] is enabled* in "Settings (administrator)". * The factory default FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLY (page 5-143 Toner - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 719
preview image is an image for the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result. • Tap [Erase Specified Range] on the action panel to delete unwanted area Other Address] on the action panel. ► FORWARDING RECEIVED DATA MANUALLY (page 5-143) • To save the selected image, tap the [File] key. - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 720
) When the machine cannot print because it is out of paper or out of toner, received Internet faxes are forwarded print) (page 5-133) 1 Tap the [Settings] key on the Home screen. 2 Select the [System Settings] key and tap the [Image Send Settings] key. 3 Tap the [Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 721
procedure for accessing the setting mode (Web version), see Start Guide. The following explanation assumes that the setting mode (Web version) the [Submit] button. • [Always Print]: Always prints received data before forwarding the data. • [Print at Error]: Prints received data only when an error - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 722
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS 3 Click [Sender Address Registration] in the [Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings] menu in the "Settings (Web version)". 4 Enter the sender address or fax number in "Internet Fax Address" or "Fax Number" as appropriate, and click - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 723
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS 9 Select the forwarding conditions. • To always forward received data, select [Always Forward]. • To specify a day and time on which received data will be forwarded, select [Forward received data only on specified days.] and select the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 724
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►INTERNET FAX RECEPTION FUNCTIONS 16 Select [Always Forward] or [Forward received data only on specified days.] from the forwarding table. The forwarding permission settings that appear here are linked to the forwarding conditions set in step 9. If you wish to use different - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 725
faxes cannot be saved. • Depending on the setting, received faxes that cannot be saved because of the file number limit or other reason are either printed or saved in the inbound routing error box. 5-142 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 726
MANUALLY Received faxes can be forwarded manually default setting is disabled. When data is received, is shown at the top of the screen. 1 Select ExternalSAypsptelimcaItniofonrmation Exit Event Information Maintenance Information Toner All Received Data Cancel All Print Check Image Forward to - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 727
* in "Settings (administrator)". * The factory default setting is disabled. Received data inside the memory Event Information Maintenance Information Toner Remaining In the System 2 Received Data List All Received Data Cancel All Print Check Image Forward to Other Address Delete File Store - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 728
A RESERVED JOB OR THE JOB IN PROGRESS (page 1-140) ► CHECKING COMPLETED JOBS (page 1-141) Job Status Print Job Address Broadcast Scan LINE PRINTER Back Fax Set Time Pages Internet Fax Status Print Image Sending Activity Report Back 10:45 07/07 0001/0001 0010/0010 OK Job Queue Complete - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 729
queue list. When reception is completed, the job moves to the completed job list and the status field displays "In Memory". After Internet Fax printing is completed, the status changes to "Received". Timer transmission jobs A timer transmission job appears at the end of the job queue list until the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 730
Setup Guide. • This function cannot be used when it has been disabled using "Disable Scan Function" in the system settings (administrator). • The procedures for selecting the scanner driver and starting scanning vary depending on the TWAIN-compliant application. For more information, see the manual - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 731
mode icon does not appear, tap to move the screen. Toner Quantity Bk Operation Guide Enlarge Display Mode Settings Total Count LCD Control Job Status When PC ] from the [File] menu. 4 Select the scanner driver of the machine. (1) Select [SHARP MFP TWAIN K]. (2) Click the [Select] button. 5 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 732
in the "Scanning Position" menu, the [Zoom Preview] function cannot be used. • For further information on the scan settings, click the open scanner driver Help. button in the preview image screen of step 7 to • If the [Preview] button is clicked when scanning from the document feeder tray, only - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 733
the button to automatically set the scanning area to the entire preview image. • For further information on the scan settings, click button to open scanner driver Help. • If the originals are placed in the document feeder tray, only the top page will be previewed. The top page will be delivered to - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 734
machine] 9 This machine is in the PC scan mode. Do not remove the original. Scanner IP address: 0.0.0.0.0 PC Scan Exit 10:15 AM Toner Quantity Bk Operation Guide Enlarge Display Mode Settings Total Count LCD Control Job Status 10 PC scan in progress. Finish PC scan mode? 10:15 AM PC Scan - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 735
SCANNER/INTERNET FAX►METADATA DELIVERY METADATA DELIVERY PREPARATIONS FOR METADATA DELIVERY METADATA DELIVERY (DATA ENTRY) When the application integration module kit is installed, metadata (data indicating the attributes of the image file and how it is to be processed) is generated based on pre- - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 736
transmission destinations at the time of transmission using one-touch keys, manual entry, or a global address book search. (Addresses for which DELIVERY USING SCAN TO DESKTOP When Network Scanner Tool is used in its factory default configuration, a file will be generated with a new file name on the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 737
the selected metadata. 1 Tap the [Data Entry] icon on the [Home Screen], and tap [Metadata Set]. If a specific metadata set has been specified as the default set, go to step 3. If no metadata sets have been stored, Metadata Entry is unavailable. Store metadata set in the setting mode (Web version - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 738
. E-mail address to which the transmission result will be sent. Job name appearing in the E-mail "Subject" line, or job name on the fax cover sheet. When the user enters a [Subject] in the send settings screen in the touch panel, the entered value is applied as metadata. Enter the file name - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 739
Custom Filenames Address Type Allowing Metadata Entry Name XML Tag Name Entry Type Include MFP Extended Scan Settings in XML File. To Be Used as Default Settings Enter a metadata name. Select a destination where you wish to send the image and metadata. Enable or disable to edit the name of image - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 740
• FILE 6-10 SAVING DOCUMENT DATA ONLY (SCAN TO HDD • SAVE ON HDD DEFAULT SETTING FOR SCAN SAVE SAVE IN EXTERNAL MEMORY DEVICE . . . . . 6-15 FILE TO RETRIEVE 6-25 FILE PRINTING 6-25 MULTI-FILE PRINTING 6-27 • MULTI-FILE PRINTING 6-27 • BATCH PRINTING 6-28 FILE TRANSMISSION 6-29 FILE - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 741
Reuse Image send Printer Print Hard disk Transmission Download Your computer External memory device Uses of document filing Using the document filing function allows you to additionally print out conference material with the same settings, or print out ledger sheets used for routine tasks - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 742
drive. Unlike Quick File, various types of information can be appended to the file when the file is saved to enable efficient file management. A password can also be established. This function scans an original and stores it to the hard drive. Like File, various types of information can be appended - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 743
available as a location for storing files by [File] and [File Store]. Store a custom folder and specify it as a location for storing files. Specify a password for the user folder as required. Enter the PIN Code to use the folder. My Folder A previously created custom folder can be selected as "My - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 744
DOCUMENT FILING►DOCUMENT FILING Approximate number of pages and files that can be stored Combined total number of pages and total number of files that can be stored in custom folders and in the Main folder Examples of original types Number of pages* Number of files Full color original (Text - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 745
password (5 to 32 characters) for file protection. • The above information cannot be specified when a file is saved with Quick File. • When you select [Create Downloadable by others. • Except in cases provided for by law, SHARP Corporation bears no responsibility for any damages that result from the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 746
, and then tap [Quick File] or [File]. • Using document filing in print mode To use document filing in print mode, select document filing in the printer driver. For details on document filing, see "SAVING AND USING PRINT FILES (DOCUMENT FILING) (page 3-75)" in "PRINTER". • Using document filing in - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 747
BBB DDD FFF HHH JJJ LLL Scan to HDD Scan to External Memory Device Select File from FTP to Print Select File from USB Memory to Print Select File from Network Folder to Print CA Use to search for a file in a folder. Displays the functions available in document filing mode. Switch the custom - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 748
A PROCEDURE FOR PLACING THE ORIGINAL DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND STATUS OF THE ORIGINAL (page 1-129) 2 Original Auto 8½x11 NNoo..ooffccooppieiess 1 Send and Print Quick File Store Data Temporarily Change to normal mode and tap [Quick File] on the action panel so that Paper Select 2-Sided Copy - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 749
scanned data is stored in the quick file folder." appears for 6 seconds (default setting) after the [Start] key is tapped. To change the message display in the Main folder or stored Custom folder as a file simultaneously with printing or transmission. The stored file can be retrieved at a later time, - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 750
name (page 6-13) ► Specifying the folder (page 6-13) ► Creating PDF for PC browsing (page 6-14) File Information No. of copies 1 Off Sharing Password On User Name User Unknown File Name Copy_20161010_134725 Stored to Main Folder Create PDF for PC Browsing Others 3 8½x14 4 11x17 8½x11 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 751
being moved, or automatically or manually deleted. Three properties are available for Default Mode Settings]. Administrator permission settings for confidential files. • Administrator Authority Setting For files and user folders that have a password, this setting allows the administrator password - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 752
, "My Folder" of that user will automatically be selected. 2 Tap the key of the folder where you want to store the file, and tap . If a password has been set for the folder, a password entry screen appears. Enter the password (5 to 8 digits number) using the numeric keys and tap the . 6-13 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 753
to , and a public PDF for PC browsing will be created when the file is saved. Default Setting of PDF Format for PC Browsing You can set the initial file format of public PDF or the file for download which is created during execution of each job. In "Settings (administrator)", select [System Settings - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 754
ON HDD Storing from Easy Scan 1 10:15 AM Tap the [Easy Scan] key on the Home screen. Easy Copy Easy Scan Print Release Sharp OSA Toner Quantity Bk Operation Guide Enlarge Display Mode Settings Total Count LCD Control Job Status 2 Tap [Scan to HDD/USB]. 3 Place the original. Place the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 755
] key or the [2-Sided Book] key as appropriate for the original. • To set a user name, file attribute, or password, tap [Options]. • When a file is created with [Create Downloadable File] disabled, this setting cannot be enabled later. 5 Tap the [Start] key to start scanning. A beep will sound - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 756
Default Exposure Settings Default exposure settings for document filing can be configured. Select [Auto] or [Manual]. If you select [Manual], set the exposure to one of 5 levels. Default can also be turned off. Default Output Tray Selects the default output tray for printing a file stored by Scan to - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 757
device. Storing from Easy Scan 1 10:15 AM Tap the [Easy Scan] key on the Home screen. Easy Copy Easy Scan Print Release Sharp OSA Toner Quantity Bk Operation Guide Enlarge Display Mode Settings Total Count LCD Control Job Status 2 Tap [Scan to HDD/USB]. 3 Place the original. Place the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 758
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING Storing from Document Filing 1 Tap the [HDD File retrieve] key on the Home screen. 2 Tap [Scan to External Memory Device] on the action panel. 3 Place the original. Place the original in the document feeder tray of the automatic document feeder, - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 759
Easy Copu Print from external memory device (USB) Scan to External Memory Device Perform Detail Setting Sharp OSA Device]. • To select detailed settings in normal mode, select the [Perform Detail Setting] checkbox . ► NETWORK SCANNER MODE (page 5-8) Toner Quantity Bk Operation Guide - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 760
DOCUMENT FILING►SAVING FILES WITH DOCUMENT FILING 5 Check the [Sending data has been completed.] message, and remove the USB memory device from the machine. 6-21 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 761
02/02/2018 02/02/2018 02/02/2018 02/02/2018 02/02/2018 02/02/2018 Delete See Detail Information Print and Delete the Data CA Print Now ► FILE PRINTING (page 6-25) ► FILE TRANSMISSION (page 6-29) ► FILE MOVING (page 6-30) ► DELETE FILE (page 6-32) ► FILE IMAGE CHECKING (page 6-34) ► FILE MERGING - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 762
-Fax) Scan to HDD Settings For each mode, select whether or not copying of stored files is allowed. For each mode, select whether or not printing of stored files is allowed. For each mode, select whether or not fax transmission of stored files is allowed. Select whether or not I-Fax transmission - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 763
between [Select All] and [Cancel All]. Tap this key to display the usage status of the machine's built-in hard disk drive. Start printing immediately. Thumbnail display mode Switch the file display mode between list and thumbnail. Main Folder All Files Displays thumbnails of the saved files - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 764
with a PIN Code is tapped, a PIN Code entry screen will appear. Enter the PIN Code (5 to 32 characters) and tap the . • Tap the [Print Now] key to printed out the file with the settings used for its storage. • Tap the [Filter by Job] key to display the keys of a particular mode such - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 765
Copy_02022018_112200 Copy_02022018_112230 Copy_02022018_112300 Copy_02022018_112330 User Name User Unknown User Unknown User Unknown User Unknown User Unknown User Unknown User Unknown Select All Batch Print All Files Date 02/02/2018 02/02/2018 02/02/2018 02/02/2018 02/02/2018 02/02/2018 02/02 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 766
canceled. being tapped while a file is 2 Tap [Print] on the action panel. 3 When not printing with the number of copies at data saving, tap the Number from Stored Setting of Each Job.] checkbox to set to . When printing with the number of copies at data saving without specifying copies, go to - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 767
in newest or oldest order, and whether file names are sorted in ascending or descending order. 1 Tap the [Batch Print] key. 2 Batch Print Main Folder User Name Password All Files Return to File Selection Screen Change Print Number ( 1~9999 ) Apply the Number from Stored Setting of Each Job - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 768
below. ► SELECTING A FILE TO RETRIEVE (page 6-25) • A file saved in black and white or grayscale cannot be transmitted in color. • A stored print job cannot be transmitted. • These transmission methods require installation of the corresponding options. • If any of the following other modes were - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 769
User Unknown User Unknown User Unknown User Unknown Select All Batch Print All Files Date 02/02/2018 02/02/2018 02/02/ you want to move the file. If the folder with a password is tapped, a password entry screen will appear. Enter the password (5 to 8 digits number) using the numeric keys and tap - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 770
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES 4 Tap the [Move] key. 6-31 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 771
Copy_02022018_112200 Copy_02022018_112230 Copy_02022018_112300 Copy_02022018_112330 User Name User Unknown User Unknown User Unknown User Unknown User Unknown User Unknown User Unknown Select All Batch Print All Files Date 02/02/2018 02/02/2018 02/02/2018 02/02/2018 02/02/2018 02/02/2018 02/02 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 772
DOCUMENT FILING►USING STORED FILES Automatic Deletion of File You can have document filing data in specified folders automatically deleted by specifying the folders and the time. Periodic deletion of files stored in the machine helps to prevent the disclosure of sensitive information and frees - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 773
image check screen on the touch panel. • A preview image is an image for display on the touch panel. It will differ from the actual print result. • The image check screen does not appear when multiple files are selected. After selecting the desired file, follow the steps below. ► SELECTING A FILE - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 774
Unknown User Unknown User Unknown User Unknown User Unknown Select All Batch Print All Files Date 02/02/2018 02/02/2018 02/02/ 02/2018 02/02/2018 02/02/2018 02/02/2018 Delete Print Move Combine File Print and Delete the Data CA Print Now Tap [Combine File] on the action panel. 2 Append file - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 775
SCREEN Files stored using File and Quick File appear as keys in the job status complete screen. This is convenient when you need to quickly print the saved data of a copy job or quickly send a saved fax to another destination. 1 Tap the job status display. 2 Tap the tab with a file to - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 776
Device Select File from FTP to Print Select File from USB Memory to Print Select File from Network Folder to Print CA To search for a specific folder, tap its key. If the folder with a password is tapped, a password entry screen will appear. Enter the password (5 to 8 digits number) using the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 777
To search for the current folder, set the [Search Just Within the Folder] checkbox to . PIN Code/Password Date Search Just Within the Folder Search Start CA Print Now [User Name] Search using the user name. Select a user on the user selection screen that appears, and then tap . [Login Name - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 778
Print], [Select File from USB Memory to Print] or [Select File from Network Folder to Print]. For more information, see "PRINTING WITHOUT THE PRINTER DRIVER clicking [Print], [Send], [Move], or [Delete]. If the file to be manipulated has a password, enter the password in "PIN Code/Password of File - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 779
Use these settings to enter search conditions. A specified file can be manipulated by clicking [Print], [Send], [Move], or [Delete]. If the file to be manipulated has a password, enter the password in "PIN Code/Password of File". Item Description User Name Select from User List Login Name Search - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 780
FINISHING MODE . . . 7-3 PAPERS CHECKING TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER 7-4 PAPER LOADING ORIENTATION 7-5 • STAPLE 7-5 • PUNCH 7-6 • FOLD 7-6 OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING USING MANUAL FINISHING 7-8 STAPLE FUNCTION 7-10 • COPIES/PAGES FUNCTION 7-11 • TRIMMER SETTING 7-12 PUNCH FUNCTION 7-13 PAPER - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 781
set for finish on copied or printed pages. You can select the manual finishing mode if the inserter is installed. When the finisher (large stacker), saddle stitch finisher (large stacker), punch module, or folding unit is installed, finishing operations, such as stapling, punching or folding can be - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 782
as explained in "CHANGING MODES (page 1-19)". BASE SCREEN OF MANUAL FINISHING MODE Shows the selected paper and output trays. Selects an Sets the number of copies for output and the number of sheets per set. Resets all settings. Staples the center of the booklet and folds the booklet along the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 783
MANUAL FINISHING►PAPERS PAPERS CHECKING TYPE AND SIZE OF PAPER You can each of the upper and lower trays. Output Tray Upper Tray Middle Tray Lower Tray Staple Off 1 Staple at Back 1 Staple at Front 2 Staples Saddle Stitch Punch Off 2 Hole Punch Inserter Upper Tray Lower Tray Plain 1 8½x11 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 784
MANUAL FINISHING►PAPERS PAPER LOADING ORIENTATION When using the staple, punch or the paper folding function, the original must be placed as shown below to enable stapling or punching in the desired position on the paper. STAPLE Touch panel key Orientation Result A A 1 Staple at Back A A A - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 785
MANUAL FINISHING►PAPERS • To use the staple function, you need to mount a finisher (large stacker) or saddle stitch finisher (large stacker). • To use the saddle stitch function, you need to mount a saddle - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 786
MANUAL FINISHING►PAPERS Touch panel key Orientation C-Fold ABC Result C A Accordion Fold Double Fold ABC ABCD AC DA Z-Fold ABCD AB D • A folding unit is required to - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 787
manual finishing mode, and carry out the following procedure. ► SELECTING MANUAL FINISHING MODE (page 7-3) 1 Set the guides to the size of the paper. Grasp the guide lock lever to adjust the guide the appropriate finishing method. ► STAPLE FUNCTION (page 7-10) Staple Punch Fold ► PUNCH FUNCTION - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 788
TRAY (page 7-17) Off 1 Staple at Back 1 Staple at Front Saddle Stitch Off 2 Hole Punch Off Saddle Fold Half Fold Accordion Fold Double Fold Z-Fold Copies/Pages CA 2 Staples C-Fold Detail Start 5 Tap the [Start] key to begin manual finishing. To stop manual finishing: Tap the [Stop] key - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 789
function cannot be used with other manual finishing functions. • If you load only one sheet of paper while the staple function is ON, the staple function is temporarily turned OFF and the sheet is not stapled. Selecting staple function Tap your desired staple key in the [Staple]. The output tray is - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 790
Tray Upper Tray Middle Tray Lower Tray Staple Off 1 Staple at Back 1 Staple at Front 2 Staples Saddle Stitch Punch Off 2 Hole Punch Inserter 1 8½x11 Tap the [Manual] key and specify the number of output copies and the Copies Specify Number of Sets to be printed. 1 (1-999) Lower Tray - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 791
pages, specify "1" for the number of sets to be printed. If you set more copies or pages than the number of copies or pages that can be stapled, a message is displayed and the [Start] key is disabled. See "Specifications" in the "Start Guide" and specify the number of copies or pages that can - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 792
FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING PUNCH FUNCTION If a punch module is installed, holes can key under "Punch". Output Tray Upper Tray Middle Tray Lower Tray Staple Off 1 Staple at Back 1 Staple at Front 2 Staples Saddle Stitch Trimmer Setting Punch Off 2 Hole Punch Inserter Upper Tray - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 793
FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING PAPER FOLDING FUNCTION When a paper folding unit is installed, you can fold papers in Z-fold and C-fold. When a saddle stitch finisher (large stacker) is - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 794
FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING Types of Folds Z-Fold Folding results ABCD AB D Paper Size 11" × 17", 8-1/2" × 14", 8-1/2" × 11"R, A3, B4, A4R • Special media such as transparency film and tab paper cannot be used. • The paper folding function cannot be used with the staple and hole - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 795
MANUAL FINISHING Setting Multiple Fold (when Saddle Fold is selected) 1 Output Tray Upper Tray Middle Tray Lower Tray Staple Off 1 Staple at Back 1 Staple at Front 2 Staples Fold Multiple Sheets Together] checkbox to . After the settings are completed, tap . Fold Multiple Sheets Together - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 796
FINISHING►OPERATION OF MANUAL FINISHING TO CHANGE THE PAPER TRAY The paper select the output tray you require. Output Tray Upper Tray Middle Tray Lower Tray Staple Off 1 Staple at Back 1 Staple at Front 2 Staples Saddle Stitch Punch Off 2 Hole Punch Inserter Upper Tray Lower Tray Type and - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 797
Settings Network Name Setting Protocol Settings Services Settings Print Port Settings External Print Services Settings LDAP Settings Proxy Setting Wireless Settings Device Web Page Setting Security Settings Password Change Change Password Port Control Filter Setting SSL Settings - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 798
of Hard Disk 8-102 • E-mail Alert and Status 8-103 Image Quality Adjustment 8-104 • Collective Adjustment 8-104 • Copy Image Quality 8-105 • Print Image Quality 8-105 • Scan Image Quality 8-106 • Common Functions 8-106 Initial Installation Settings 8-107 SETTING MODE FOR FAX 8-2 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 799
password To maintain security, the machine administrator should promptly change the password after the machine is purchased. (For the default administrator password, see Start Guide.) To change the password, see "Change Password Easy Copy Easy Scan Print Release Sharp OSA The setting menu - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 800
] key. Easy Copy Easy Scan Print Release Sharp OSA Toner Quantity Bk Operation Guide Enlarge Display Mode Settings Total Count Settings: DHCP: IPv4 Address: Subnet Mask: Default Gateway: IPv6 Settings: Enable Enable xxx.xxx.xxx Web version). For password and other information required - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 801
→ Condition Settings • Image Send Settings → Fax Settings → Default Settings, Send Settings, Receive Settings, Allow/Reject Number Setting, Polling Initial Status Settings, Condition Settings • Document Filing Settings • Sharp OSA Settings • Paper Settings. Operation Settings, Keyboard Settings, - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 802
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST SETTING MODE LIST SETTING MODE LIST The following is a list of setting mode items, factory default settings and restrictions for each item. • Depending on the machine specifications and peripheral devices installed, it may not be possible to use some settings. • - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 803
System administrator/Administrator Factory default setting U A Page Search - Yes Yes File Batch Print - Yes Yes ● Submit Print Job - Yes Yes 3-85 *1 This Disabled No Authenticate a User by Login Name and No Password No Disabled No Disabled No - No Yes 1-48 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 804
Items Factory default setting U Cache User Information Enabled No Cache Period Unlimited No Cache Password for User Information Print User List No Reset Counter After Sending E-mail Status Disabled No Enable IPP Authentication Except for Printer Driver Enabled No - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 805
Disabled No Yes Disable Billing Code for Selected Applications No Yes • Sharp OSA All Invalid No Yes Billing Code Display Name Setting No Yes • Main Code Display Name Default No Yes • Sub Code Display Name Default No Yes Main Code List - No Yes Sub Code List - No - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 806
Auto Paper Selection U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Factory default setting U A Page Rotation Copy No - No 9999 No No 1/2" (10mm) No Off No Left to Right/Right, and Down No No Print No No X: 3-3/8" (86 mm), Y: 2-1/8" (54 mm) No Disabled No Enabled - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 807
SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A Page Auto Selection Staple Sort*2 1 Staple No Yes Staple Position*2 Left No Yes Punch*3 - No Yes Fold*1 Fold Inside No Yes • Fold Multiple Sheets Together Disabled No Yes Text /Image Printing - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 808
Setting Disable Blank Page Print 2-Sided Print N-Up Fit To Page Output • Print per Unit • Separator Page - Insert Before Job - Insert After Job • Staple Sort*1 • Punch*2 U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Factory default setting U A Page Enabled Disabled - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 809
Yes OOXML Settings Yes Yes Print What Selected Sheet Yes Yes Print Release Settings For information about each of the print release settings, see No Yes "Print Release Settings Guide". E-mail Print Settings No Yes E-mail Print Disabled No Yes POP3 Server Port - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 810
Addresses of Sending Modes Only Enabled No Yes Category Displayed as Default None No Yes Display all address type regardless of the mode Order Disabled No Yes 1-146 Hold Setting for Received Data Print Default Verification Stamp*3 • E-mail/Scan/Data Entry • Fax/Internet Fax - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 811
fax expansion kit is installed *3 When a stamp unit is installed Scan Settings Setup Items Factory default setting U ● Default Address Scan Settings Initial Status Settings • Default Color Mode Settings No - Scanner Common Auto: Mono2 No + Disable Change of B/W Setting in Auto - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 812
Bk Letter Emphasis + Specified Pages per File - OCR Setting + Font + Detect Image Direction + File Name Extraction • Easy Scan Settings - Color - B/W Factory default setting U No PDF No Disabled No Compression Mode: MMR (G4) No Compression Ratio: Medium No Disabled No Disabled No No - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 813
Enabled, Skip Blank Page No • Disable Scan Function No - PC Scan Disabled No • Preset restriction of E-mail for direct input - No Default Address Disabled No • Add Selected Select From Address Book No - Index All Destinations No - Display Items 10 No - Allow cancel of the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 814
Tone Initial File Format Setting • File Type • Compression Mode Auto Wake Up Print Speaker Volume Setting • Receive Signal • Communication Error Signal Original Print on Transaction Report Factory default setting U Disabled No 200x100dpi No Disabled No No TIFF-F No MH (G3) No - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 815
Times at Reception Error 2 Time(s) No Maximum Size of E-mail Attachments Unlimited No Rotation Sending Setting All Enabled No Default Own Number Sending Enabled No Printing Page Number at Receiver Enabled No Recall in Case of Line Busy No • Number of Times to Recall When - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 816
Authentication • User Name • Password - Change Password • POP3 Communication Timeout • Reception Check Interval Setting • Enable SSL Default Settings • I-Fax Own (Manual) Setup Items ● Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual) Fax Settings*1 Internet Fax Settings*2 Reception Start Manual Reception - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 817
Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings Setup Items Factory default setting U ● Inbound Routing (Forwarding/Storing) Settings* Disabled No • Disabling of Forward Condition Change Disabled No • Print Style Setting Print at Error No File Name Setting No • Preset of Character - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 818
Faxes by Date in Folders Disabled No • File Format PDF No • Print Style Setting Print Only at Storage Error No File Name Setting No • Preset of Metadata Settings Metadata Delivery Metadata Set List Factory default setting U No Disabled No - No A Page Yes Yes Yes - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 819
Settings Default Mode Settings Sort Method Setting Administrator Authority Setting • Delete File • Delete Folder • Change PIN Code/Password Setting of store/delete after file print U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Factory default setting U A Page Sharing Mode - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 820
• Apply the resolution at job execution • Resolution Document Output Options Print • Copies • Printer • Scan Send • Internet Fax Send(Incl. PC-I-Fax Printer • Scan Send • Internet Fax Send(Incl. PC-I-Fax)*1 Factory default setting U No No MMR (G4) No No Medium No Disabled No Disabled - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 821
fax expansion kit is installed *2 When a facsimile expansion kit is installed *3 This setting is configured in setting mode on the machine. Factory default setting U Disabled No Enabled No No Enabled No No Disabled No Disabled No Disabled No Disabled No Enabled No Disabled No - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 822
Sharp OSA Settings Setup Items ● Sharp OSA Settings Condition Settings*1 Cookie Setting Delete Cookie Standard Application Settings Receiving Application Setting Forward to Application Application Name Address for Web Service administrator/Administrator Factory default setting U A - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 823
setting U - No 1min. No 20 seconds No A Page Yes Yes 1-204 Yes U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Factory default setting U A Page Yes Enabled Yes Enabled Yes Yes Plain 1, 8-1/2" x 11" Yes Plain 1, Auto-Inch Yes (Auto-AB) Yes Plain 1, 8-1/2" x 11 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 824
Setting No - Keys Touch Sound Middle No - Make Key Touch Sound at Default Setting Disabled No - Auto Clear Setting 60sec. No + Cancel Timer Disabled of Bypass Printing Disabled No • Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode Disabled No • Disable Printing of Operation Manual from the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 825
Setup Items - Default List/Thumbnail Display + Fax/I-Fax Reception Data*3, *4 + File Retrieve of Main Folder/Quick File Folder + File Retrieve of Custom Folder + File Retrieve of Direct Print • Remote Operation Settings - Remote Software Operation + Operational Authority + View Password Entry Screen - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 826
Unit*8 Disabling of Trimming Module*9 Enable/Disable Settings User Control • Disabling of Printing by Invalid User Copy Function Settings • Disabling of Registration/Deletion of Program Factory default setting U Plain 1: Enabled, Plain 2: Enabled, Recycled: No Disabled Plain 1 No No - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 827
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U • Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Copy Disabled copying Disabled No Printer Settings • Prohibit Notice Page Printing Enabled No • Prohibit Test Page Printing Disabled No • Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto Paper - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 828
Clock Adjustment • Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode • Disable Printing of Operation Manual from the Operation Panel Device Control • Disabling of Document Settings • Hidden Pattern Print Setting - Disable Direct Entry Machine Identification Settings Factory default setting U No Enabled - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 829
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U A Page Clock Adjust No Yes Clock Adjust No Yes • Current Date - No Yes • Specify Time Zone - No Yes 8-76 • Date&Time Settings - No Yes • - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 830
Server • Sender Name • Sender Address • Enable SSL • SMTP Authentication • User Name • Password - Change Password • Connection Test U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Factory default setting U A Page Wired+Wireless (Access Point Mode) Enabled - - - - - - - - No Yes No - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 831
Name • Search Root • LDAP Server • User Name • Password - Change Password • Authentication Type • KDC Server • Realm • Allow selection - Use of Storage Network Name Setting Device Name Domain Name Comment Factory default setting U No - No - No - No - No - No - No - No - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 832
DHCP • IPv4 Address • Subnet Mask • Default Gateway IPv6 Settings • IPv6 • DHCPv6 • Manual Address / Prefix Length • Default Gateway MTU Settings • MTU SMB Settings • Use SMB1.0 • Use SMB2.0 • Use SMB2.1 • Use SMB3.0 Ping Command • IPv4 • IPv6 Services Settings DNS • DNS Settings - IPv4 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 833
- Sender Address - Enable SSL - SMTP Authentication - User Name - Password - POP before SMTP - Connection Test Kerberos • Kerberos Authentication Settings - mDNS - Service Name - Domain Name - Highest Priority Service SNMP • SNMP v1 Settings - SNMP v1 Settings Factory default setting U - No - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 834
Port Number - Timeout - Use Bidirectional WSD • WSD Settings - WSD Print - Use Multicast Discovery External Print Services Settings Google Cloud Print Settings • Google Cloud Print Factory default setting U Read-write Access No public No - No Disabled No public No - No Disabled - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 835
Prints • E-mail • Device Name • Register with Google Cloud Print • Delete from Google Cloud Print • Registration URL/QR code AirPrint Settings • AirPrint (Print) • AirPrint (Scan) • AirPrint (Fax Send) • mDNS • IPP • IPP-SSL • Service Name Search Attribute: Factory default setting U - No - - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 836
Yes Yes Yes 8-88 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 8-89 Yes 1-93 Yes Yes Yes 8-91 Yes Yes Yes Security Settings Setup Items ● Security Settings Password Change U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Factory default setting U A Page - No Yes 8-92 8-40 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 837
Password User Password • Change Password • Protect Settings by Password Administrator Password • Change Password Port Control Server Port • HTTP - Port Number • HTTPS - Port Number • FTP Print - Port Number • Raw Print • WSD • Print Release - Port Number Factory default setting U Disabled - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 838
• Tandem Output Send • Data Backup Send • Print Release • XMPP Filter Setting Filter IP Address Filter Settings • Filter Mode • Filter Address 1-4 - Start IP Address - End IP Address MAC Address Filter Settings • Filter Address 1-10 Factory default setting U No Enabled No 10080 No - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 839
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Setup Items Factory default setting U SSL Settings No Condition Settings No • Setting of SSL No - Server Port No + HTTPS Enabled No + IPP-SSL Disabled No + Redirect HTTP to HTTPS - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 840
Password • Server Authentication • EAP Timeout • Number of EAP Retries • Device Certificate - Certificate Status - CA Certificate Status Make of Certificate Signing Request(CSR) Security Control Restrict Print Jobs other than the current Print Received Data Factory default setting U Disabled - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 841
Items • E-mail • FTP • Desktop • File Format Hidden Pattern Print Setting Initial Status Settings • Default Settings - Hidden Pattern Print Setting - Exposure - Size - Angle - Font Style - Camouflage Pattern - Print Method • Print Contents Setting - Pre-Set Word - Unit Serial Number - Account - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 842
Print Upper Side of Paper - Print Lower Side of Paper • Horizontal position - Print Left Side of Paper - Print Right Side of Paper Select the Job to Print • Copy • Print • Prints configured in setting mode on the web page. Factory default setting U No Disabled No Enabled No No Enabled No - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 843
General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A Page ● Energy Save Eco Setting Document Filing All Enabled No Yes Manual Finishing* Enabled No Yes System Settings Enabled No Yes Sharp OSA All Enabled No Yes Energy Saving - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 844
Status Status Message Alerts Message * This setting is configured in setting mode on the machine. U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Factory default setting U A Page - - 50000 - - - - - - - No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 8-100 No Yes No Yes No Yes - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 845
U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A Page ● Image Quality Adjustment Collective No Yes Sharpness 2 No Yes Image Quality Priority • Auto No Yes 8-105 0 No Yes • Text/Prtd.Photo 0 No Yes Print Image Quality No - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 846
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SETTING MODE LIST Initial Installation Settings U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Setup Items Factory default setting U A Page ● Initial Installation Settings Condition Settings No Yes Name - No Yes Machine Code - No Yes Machine - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 847
conditions are displayed in the following priority order. • Printer Error • Account Limit • Incorrect Paper • Overdue service maintenance • Paper jammed • Marker supply missing • No toner • Replace waste toner box. • Cover open • The paper is not available. • Input tray empty • Specified input tray - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 848
• In All Sending Address List, the following items are handled by 2-sided printing on an item basis. • Individual List • Group List Device Status This screen in the machine. Displays the current status of supplies. If staples are installed, their status is displayed. Displays the information of - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 849
SYSTEM SETTINGS►STATUS Network Status The Network Status screen shows the general status information and the statuses relevant to, TCP/IP, DNS, and WINS protocols. The information displayed here consists of the items that are configured in the Network Settings and their settings. For information on - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 850
interface settings, etc.). • PCL Symbol Set List • PCL Internal Font List • PCL Extended Font List • PS Font List • NIC Page Lists can be printed of various addresses stored in the machine. • Individual List • Group List • Memory Box List This shows the folder names for document filing. Prohibit - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 851
List • Fax Settings List* • I-Fax Settings List* • Document Filing Settings List • Sharp OSA Settings List Common Lists of the administrator settings for the following modes can be printed. • Paper Settings List • Machine Identification Settings List • Operation Settings List • Keyboard Settings - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 852
machine. Hexadecimal Dump Mode This function is used to print the print data from a computer in hexadecimal format together with the corresponding printer errors occur frequently, it is recommended that you use the factory default setting "Auto". Port Switching Method Selects when port switching takes place - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 853
driver is used.) Settings Setup Items Copies Orientation Paper Size Output Tray Paper Type Resolution Setting Disable Blank Page Print 2-Sided Print N-Up Print*1 Fit To Page*4 Output Separator Page Staple Position*5 Punch*7 Description 1 - 9999 sets • Portrait • Landscape Set the default - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 854
feed code used in a PCL environment. Settings Setup Items PCL Symbol Set Setting Settings Specify the symbol set used for printing. PCL Font Setting Select a font used for printing. PCL Line Feed Code This setting is used to select how the printer responds when a line feed command is received - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 855
) OOXML Settings To print an Excel file by direct print, select a sheet (with the part to be printed selected) or the entire book. Print Release Settings Select this option to use the E-mail printing. For detailed information, see "Print Release Settings Guide". E-mail Print Settings Select this - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 856
Set the password used to log in to the FTP server. Enable SSL Set to enable SSL. Use PASV mode Set to use PASV mode. Direct Print Settings (Network Folder) Configure these settings if you will be printing files on a network folder by direct print. A list of available network folders is shown - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 857
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Print Setting from PC/Mobile Terminal Configure these settings to print files on a computer or mobile terminal by direct print. FTP Print Specify whether or not FTP print settings are used for direct print. Port Number Enter the port number used for direct print. 8-61 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 858
for Login The home directory of the login user is set as the default address. Select [Allow cancel of the first entered address] based on your . When this setting is disabled, selection of an address other than the entered default address is prohibited. If an e-mail address is not set for the logged - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 859
and added to the file name. Note: To prevent duplicate file names, select Date or Unique Identifier. Default Subject Set a maximum of 80 full-width/half-width characters for the default subject for E-mail and Internet Fax transmission. Add Job Information Automatically to the Mail Message Body You - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 860
fax, Direct SMTP, etc.) can be configured. Default Settings Configures the default settings for Internet fax. Resolution Setting Apply the [MMR (G4)] cannot be selected when [File Type] is set to [TIFF-S]. Auto Wake Up Print When the [Power] button is "Off" (but the main power switch is "On") and an - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 861
time, each new transaction will delete the oldest transaction (the oldest transaction will not be printed). • The Transaction Report can be printed out manually as needed. See "List for Administrator (page 8-55)" . Body Text Print Select Setting Image files attached to Internet faxes are normally - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 862
A5R, 16K 8-1/2" x 11"R and A4R size images are not rotated. Default Own Number Sending You can include the date and your sender information (sender when the receiving machine prints an image that you send. Printing Page Number at Receiver When the transmitted image is printed by the receiving machine - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 863
IP Address." is enabled. Enter the host name or IP address (maximum of 64 characters). Multiple forwarding addresses cannot be stored. Letter Size RX Reduce Print When an A3 size fax is received, this function reduces the fax to ledger (11" x 17") size. When this setting is enabled, ledger (11" x 17 - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 864
in the blank area that results. The [Outside the Received Image] cannot be selected for the reception date and time print setting if "Auto Receive Reduce Setting (page 8-67)" is not enabled. POP3 Communication Timeout Setting The duration of time the machine waits until stopping reception - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 865
32 characters for the password used to access the server. POP3 Communication Timeout Set a timeout for communication to the POP3 server. Reception Check Interval Setting Enter an acknowledge cycle to the POP3 server. Enable SSL Use SSL to encrypt data before transmission. Default Settings Own Number - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 866
that were not printed will be forwarded. • If you select [System Settings] in "Settings" → [IImage Send Settings] → [Operation Settings] → [Default Settings] and if "Hold Setting for Received Data Print" is enabled, you are prompted to enter a password. Enter the correct password using numeric keys - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 867
to the stored forwarding table. When this function is enabled, you can also have the received Internet faxes forwarded to a specified e-mail address without printing them. Table Registration You can store or edit the data forwarding table that has the received data forward settings. Up to 50 data - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 868
used for inbound routing. List name Disable Registration of Forward Table Disable Change/Delete of Forward Table Disabling of Forward Condition Change Print Style Setting Preset of Character File Naming No.1 - No.7 If received from a contact registered in the address book, sender's name is changed - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 869
by date. File Format Select the file format for inbound routing. Print Style Setting Configure print settings for received faxes. • Save and print: Save received faxes to hard disk, and also print. • Only print when save error occurs: Print received fax when save fails. • Save in inbound routing - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 870
password are not used, the page count may not be added to the appropriate user count or only the master machine may print. • The factory default the toner fusing temperature according to the weight of the paper. These settings apply to plain paper, recycled paper, punched paper, pre-printed paper, - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 871
SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Disabling of Offset Disable offset output. Disabling of Stapler This setting is used to prohibit the use of staple, such as when the staple of inner finisher, finisher or saddle finisher malfunctions. Disabling of Punch This setting is used to prohibit the use of punch - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 872
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Clock Adjust Use this to set the date and time in the machine's built-in clock. If [System Settings] in "Settings (administrator)" → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] is enabled, the date and time cannot be set. Item - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 873
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Date Format The format used to print the date on lists and other output can be changed. If [System Settings] in "Settings (administrator)" → [Common Settings] → [Enable/Disable Settings] → [Disabling of Clock Adjustment] - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 874
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Custom Link Setting The stored Web addresses can be displayed in the display area of the setting menu. Click a custom link to jump to the website of the stored address. Network Settings Quick Settings Select the minimum required settings for the machine connection - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 875
it is not necessary to manually enter an IP address. change automatically. If the IP address changes, printing will not be possible. • If the machine the IP subnet mask. Default Gateway Enter the default gateway address. DNS Settings This requires the server to support the STARTTLS command. To allow - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 876
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Password Enter the password. Change Password To change the password, set . Connection Test Tap the [Execute] button to test the connection to the SMTP server. LDAP Settings Name Enter the address book name. Search Root Enters the search defaults to search for a - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 877
an IP address. Manual Address / Prefix Length Enter the IP address and the prefix length (0 to 128) of the machine. Default Gateway Enter the default gateway address. • If DHCPv6 is used, the IP address assigned to the machine may change automatically. If the IP address changes, printing will not be - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 878
the SMB protocol version, or when there is a problem in the connection with another device due to different response by the PC or not is displayed. Services Settings Select the general network settings. Select the server. Timeout Enter a timeout. The default setting is 2 seconds. This time is - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 879
password, set [Change Password] to . • Enable SSL: If set to , the POP over SSL communication or the POP over TLS communication by STLS command is enabled. This requires the server to support port number of the Kerberos authentication server. The default setting is port 88. Realm Enter the Kerberos - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 880
Enter a port number. The default setting is port 123. Timeout Enter a timeout. The default setting is 5 seconds. Synchronous to use the mDNS settings. Service Name Enter a service name. Domain Name Display the domain name. Highest Priority Service Select a service you use with the priority. SNMP - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 881
setting is 90 seconds. Use Banner Set this option to use the banner. The default setting is "Invalid". RAW Raw Print Settings Raw Print Set this option to use RAW printing. The default setting is "Valid". Port Number Enter a port number. The default setting is port 9100. Timeout Enter a timeout. The - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 882
Print Services Settings Google Cloud Print Settings Google Cloud Print Status "Not Set", "Registering", "Registered", or "Offline" will appear.Specify whether or not Google Cloud Print is used. Always Retain Prints The retention print of the machine. Follow the instructions that appear after you log - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 883
commas. Enter the IP address or host name of the LDAP server. Select the Default or Custom from the service type list. The default setting is Default. Set the user ID property. The default setting is "uid". Set the LDAP search property. The default setting is "cn". Set the e-mail address search. The - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 884
a user name to access the proxy server. Enter a password to allow access to the proxy server. Enter the proxy server port number. Specify exception addresses for a proxy that is used in the external service connect function, Google Cloud Print and Sharp OSA. [Entry method] 1) Can be set using a host - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 885
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Wireless Settings It provides access to a network via a wireless LAN. Clicking the [Submit] button stores the settings. Connection Type Use this setting to switch between [Wired Only], [Wired+Wireless (Access Point Mode)] or [Wireless (Infrastructure Mode)]. Keep - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 886
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Device IP Address (Access Point Mode) Enter the IP address. Channel Select the channel to be used in wireless LAN. Sending Output Configure the sending output. Bandwidth Use this setting when the communication mode is "11n". Select the bandwidth to be used. IP - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 887
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Device Web Page Setting The following explains the access settings to Setting mode (Web version). Number of Users who can Log-in at the Same Time Enter a number of users who can access Setting mode (Web version) simultaneously. Auto Logout Time Enter a time to - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 888
default password, see "Start Guide".) Port Control Enable or disable main system ports, set the port numbers, and tap the [Store] key. The following ports can be configured. Server Port Client Port • HTTP • HTTPS • FTP Print • Raw Print • WSD • Print Release • Sharp OSA (Expansion Platform - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 889
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Filter Setting You can set the filter by an IP or MAC address to prevent an unauthorized access to the machine via a network. Set the IP or MAC address filter and tap the [Store] key. IP Address Filter Settings This option sets an IP address. You can specify whether - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 890
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Country/Region (Required) Enter the country code. Key Length of Certificate Enter the key length of the certificate. Certificate Signing Request (CSR) When you create a certificate signing request (CSR) with [Make of Certificate Signing Request(CSR)], the content of - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 891
Setting mode (Web version) settings are not correctly selected, connection to the machine may not be allowed, or the settings may not allow printing, scanning, or Setting mode (Web version) display. In this case, deselect this setting and change the System Settings (on Web pages). Condition Settings - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 892
to the machine may not be allowed, or the settings may not allow printing, scanning, or Setting mode (Web version) display. In this case, user name used for authentication. Password Enter a maximum of 64 half-width characters for the EAP password used for authentication. Server Authentication - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 893
be selected. Item Settings Force Retention Disable Job This setting forcibly sets all print jobs as print hold jobs, even jobs for which print hold is not selected. Prohibit all print jobs other than print hold jobs. Reject Requests from External Sites You can reject the request from external - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 894
text emerges in the background on output sheets. Initial Status Settings Default Settings Item Hidden Pattern Print Setting Exposure Font Size Angle Font Style Camouflage Pattern Print Method Print Contents Setting Settings A pattern print can be printed with this settings. Select an exposure - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 895
or bottom of output pages when copy or print job is executed. Item Tracking Information Print Setting Print Information Position Select the Job to Print Settings Set this option to print the tracking information. The following information can be printed. • Serial number, characters, account job ID - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 896
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS System Control Job Log Job Log Operation Deletes or stores log of a job executed on the machine. Set the number of jobs for [The Number of Job Log to Notify by E-mail] and click [Store]. Tap the [Delete] key to delete the job log. You can save the job log by selecting - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 897
the information to another machine. This function saves you the trouble of repeatedly configuring the same settings in multiple machines. To • List print and fax forwarding items. • Count and device status display items. • IP address of the machine, device name, administrator password, sender names - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 898
Restores the current settings (you have selected in Setting mode) to the factory default settings. If you wish to create a record of the current settings before restoring, print the current settings by selecting [Status] in "Settings (administrator)" → [Data List] → [List for Administrator]". When - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 899
. To change the password, set [Change Password] to . Enter the polling interval for the POP3 server. The default setting is five minutes. Allows the POP over SSL communication or the POP over TLS communication by STLS command. This requires the server to support the POP over SSL communication - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 900
in [Collective Adjustment], all Common Functions, and removal of a toner cartridge can only be executed in setting mode on the machine. Collective execute this mode. Only in case, however, that black lines appear on the printed paper, execute this mode. Do not use this function when no black lines - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 901
priority. Set this for the auto copy exposure and text / printed photo settings. Print Image Quality Quick Image Quality Adjustment Perform quick adjustment of print quality. You can change the default setting ([2]) to [1 (Smooth)] or [3 (Sharp)]. Gray Balance You can adjust the tone and density of - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 902
scanning. Sharpness Use this setting to obtain a sharp image instructions in the message to perform density smoothing. If there are no problems after adjustment, perform "Auto Gray Calibration (for Copy)" and "Auto Gray Calibration (for Print)". To return the adjusted values to their factory default - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 903
SYSTEM SETTINGS►SYSTEM SETTINGS Initial Installation Settings This groups together the items that were set initially when the machine was installed. The initial installation setting items are the same as the regular setting items that have the same name. For information on a setting item, see the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 904
- Fax Send Complete Signal - Fax Communication Error Signal • Remote Reception Number Setting • Original Print on Transaction Report U: General user; A: System administrator/Administrator Factory default setting U A Page No Disabled No Standard No Tone No Enabled No 2 seconds No - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 905
Telephone Number for Data Forwarding - Forwarding Address Number Setting - Receiving Date & Time Print Factory default setting U No Print Out Error Report Only No Print Out All Report No No Printed Report No Print Out Notice Page No No Disabled No Disabled No Enabled No Disabled - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 906
Yes F-Code Memory Box - Yes Yes 4-107 ● Fax Data Receive/Forward (Manual) Fax Settings Yes Yes Receive Settings Auto Reception Yes Yes Multiple Set Print*3 Disabled Yes Yes 4-61 Staple Disabled Yes Yes Forward Received Data - Yes Yes *1 When an inner finisher - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 907
this product that were developed or written by SHARP are owned by SHARP and are protected by , visit the following website: http://sharp-world.com/products/copier/source/download/index.html We are unable to answer product includes software developed by Computing Services at Carnegie Mellon - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 908
and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of M.I.T. not be used in this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 909
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 910
of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 911
normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 912
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 913
spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 914
SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 915
we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 916
version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. Finally, software patents pose a constant General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 917
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 918
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 919
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 920
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 921
, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. IN NO EVENT - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 922
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 923
software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make show them these terms so they know their rights. Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with the practice for those products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 924
defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is widely used among developers working in that language. The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other than the work as a whole, that (a) is - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 925
any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. 5. Conveying Modified Source Versions. You may convey a work based on the Program, or - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 926
years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 927
to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or the public in source code form), and must require no special password or key for unpacking, reading or copying. 7. Additional Terms. - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 928
relicensing or conveying under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document, provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying. If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you must place, in - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 929
A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version". A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims owned or controlled by the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 930
to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. Limitation of Liability. IN NO EVENT - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 931
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 932
libtiff Copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam Leffler Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 933
obtained by you outside of the United States, you agree that you will not re-export the Software nor any other technical data received from SHARP, nor the direct product thereof, except as permitted by the laws and regulations of the United states and the laws and the regulation of the - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 934
OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU (AND NOT SHARP OR A SHARP AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE) ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION, SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE - Sharp MX-M6570 | MX-M6570 | MX-M7570 User Manual - Page 935
2018D-US1
-
1 -
2 -
3 -
4 -
5 -
6 -
7 -
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
-
151
-
152
-
153
-
154
-
155
-
156
-
157
-
158
-
159
-
160
-
161
-
162
-
163
-
164
-
165
-
166
-
167
-
168
-
169
-
170
-
171
-
172
-
173
-
174
-
175
-
176
-
177
-
178
-
179
-
180
-
181
-
182
-
183
-
184
-
185
-
186
-
187
-
188
-
189
-
190
-
191
-
192
-
193
-
194
-
195
-
196
-
197
-
198
-
199
-
200
-
201
-
202
-
203
-
204
-
205
-
206
-
207
-
208
-
209
-
210
-
211
-
212
-
213
-
214
-
215
-
216
-
217
-
218
-
219
-
220
-
221
-
222
-
223
-
224
-
225
-
226
-
227
-
228
-
229
-
230
-
231
-
232
-
233
-
234
-
235
-
236
-
237
-
238
-
239
-
240
-
241
-
242
-
243
-
244
-
245
-
246
-
247
-
248
-
249
-
250
-
251
-
252
-
253
-
254
-
255
-
256
-
257
-
258
-
259
-
260
-
261
-
262
-
263
-
264
-
265
-
266
-
267
-
268
-
269
-
270
-
271
-
272
-
273
-
274
-
275
-
276
-
277
-
278
-
279
-
280
-
281
-
282
-
283
-
284
-
285
-
286
-
287
-
288
-
289
-
290
-
291
-
292
-
293
-
294
-
295
-
296
-
297
-
298
-
299
-
300
-
301
-
302
-
303
-
304
-
305
-
306
-
307
-
308
-
309
-
310
-
311
-
312
-
313
-
314
-
315
-
316
-
317
-
318
-
319
-
320
-
321
-
322
-
323
-
324
-
325
-
326
-
327
-
328
-
329
-
330
-
331
-
332
-
333
-
334
-
335
-
336
-
337
-
338
-
339
-
340
-
341
-
342
-
343
-
344
-
345
-
346
-
347
-
348
-
349
-
350
-
351
-
352
-
353
-
354
-
355
-
356
-
357
-
358
-
359
-
360
-
361
-
362
-
363
-
364
-
365
-
366
-
367
-
368
-
369
-
370
-
371
-
372
-
373
-
374
-
375
-
376
-
377
-
378
-
379
-
380
-
381
-
382
-
383
-
384
-
385
-
386
-
387
-
388
-
389
-
390
-
391
-
392
-
393
-
394
-
395
-
396
-
397
-
398
-
399
-
400
-
401
-
402
-
403
-
404
-
405
-
406
-
407
-
408
-
409
-
410
-
411
-
412
-
413
-
414
-
415
-
416
-
417
-
418
-
419
-
420
-
421
-
422
-
423
-
424
-
425
-
426
-
427
-
428
-
429
-
430
-
431
-
432
-
433
-
434
-
435
-
436
-
437
-
438
-
439
-
440
-
441
-
442
-
443
-
444
-
445
-
446
-
447
-
448
-
449
-
450
-
451
-
452
-
453
-
454
-
455
-
456
-
457
-
458
-
459
-
460
-
461
-
462
-
463
-
464
-
465
-
466
-
467
-
468
-
469
-
470
-
471
-
472
-
473
-
474
-
475
-
476
-
477
-
478
-
479
-
480
-
481
-
482
-
483
-
484
-
485
-
486
-
487
-
488
-
489
-
490
-
491
-
492
-
493
-
494
-
495
-
496
-
497
-
498
-
499
-
500
-
501
-
502
-
503
-
504
-
505
-
506
-
507
-
508
-
509
-
510
-
511
-
512
-
513
-
514
-
515
-
516
-
517
-
518
-
519
-
520
-
521
-
522
-
523
-
524
-
525
-
526
-
527
-
528
-
529
-
530
-
531
-
532
-
533
-
534
-
535
-
536
-
537
-
538
-
539
-
540
-
541
-
542
-
543
-
544
-
545
-
546
-
547
-
548
-
549
-
550
-
551
-
552
-
553
-
554
-
555
-
556
-
557
-
558
-
559
-
560
-
561
-
562
-
563
-
564
-
565
-
566
-
567
-
568
-
569
-
570
-
571
-
572
-
573
-
574
-
575
-
576
-
577
-
578
-
579
-
580
-
581
-
582
-
583
-
584
-
585
-
586
-
587
-
588
-
589
-
590
-
591
-
592
-
593
-
594
-
595
-
596
-
597
-
598
-
599
-
600
-
601
-
602
-
603
-
604
-
605
-
606
-
607
-
608
-
609
-
610
-
611
-
612
-
613
-
614
-
615
-
616
-
617
-
618
-
619
-
620
-
621
-
622
-
623
-
624
-
625
-
626
-
627
-
628
-
629
-
630
-
631
-
632
-
633
-
634
-
635
-
636
-
637
-
638
-
639
-
640
-
641
-
642
-
643
-
644
-
645
-
646
-
647
-
648
-
649
-
650
-
651
-
652
-
653
-
654
-
655
-
656
-
657
-
658
-
659
-
660
-
661
-
662
-
663
-
664
-
665
-
666
-
667
-
668
-
669
-
670
-
671
-
672
-
673
-
674
-
675
-
676
-
677
-
678
-
679
-
680
-
681
-
682
-
683
-
684
-
685
-
686
-
687
-
688
-
689
-
690
-
691
-
692
-
693
-
694
-
695
-
696
-
697
-
698
-
699
-
700
-
701
-
702
-
703
-
704
-
705
-
706
-
707
-
708
-
709
-
710
-
711
-
712
-
713
-
714
-
715
-
716
-
717
-
718
-
719
-
720
-
721
-
722
-
723
-
724
-
725
-
726
-
727
-
728
-
729
-
730
-
731
-
732
-
733
-
734
-
735
-
736
-
737
-
738
-
739
-
740
-
741
-
742
-
743
-
744
-
745
-
746
-
747
-
748
-
749
-
750
-
751
-
752
-
753
-
754
-
755
-
756
-
757
-
758
-
759
-
760
-
761
-
762
-
763
-
764
-
765
-
766
-
767
-
768
-
769
-
770
-
771
-
772
-
773
-
774
-
775
-
776
-
777
-
778
-
779
-
780
-
781
-
782
-
783
-
784
-
785
-
786
-
787
-
788
-
789
-
790
-
791
-
792
-
793
-
794
-
795
-
796
-
797
-
798
-
799
-
800
-
801
-
802
-
803
-
804
-
805
-
806
-
807
-
808
-
809
-
810
-
811
-
812
-
813
-
814
-
815
-
816
-
817
-
818
-
819
-
820
-
821
-
822
-
823
-
824
-
825
-
826
-
827
-
828
-
829
-
830
-
831
-
832
-
833
-
834
-
835
-
836
-
837
-
838
-
839
-
840
-
841
-
842
-
843
-
844
-
845
-
846
-
847
-
848
-
849
-
850
-
851
-
852
-
853
-
854
-
855
-
856
-
857
-
858
-
859
-
860
-
861
-
862
-
863
-
864
-
865
-
866
-
867
-
868
-
869
-
870
-
871
-
872
-
873
-
874
-
875
-
876
-
877
-
878
-
879
-
880
-
881
-
882
-
883
-
884
-
885
-
886
-
887
-
888
-
889
-
890
-
891
-
892
-
893
-
894
-
895
-
896
-
897
-
898
-
899
-
900
-
901
-
902
-
903
-
904
-
905
-
906
-
907
-
908
-
909
-
910
-
911
-
912
-
913
-
914
-
915
-
916
-
917
-
918
-
919
-
920
-
921
-
922
-
923
-
924
-
925
-
926
-
927
-
928
-
929
-
930
-
931
-
932
-
933
-
934
-
935
 |
 |
Functions of the machine and procedures
for placing originals and loading paper
BEFORE USING THE MACHINE
COPIER
Using the copy function
PRINTER
Using the printer function
FACSIMILE
Using the fax function
SCANNER / INTERNET FAX
Using the scan / Internet fax function
DOCUMENT FILING
Storing jobs as files on the hard
drive
MANUAL FINISHING
Using the manual finishing function
Click to jump to the table of contents of the
desired chapter.
User's Manual
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MODEL: MX-M6570
MX-M7570
SYSTEM SETTINGS
Configuring settings to make the
machine easier to use